640i Gran Coupe
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you
will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help you
make full use of the technical features available in your BMW. The
manual also contains information designed to enhance operating
reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the
value of your BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the printed or
integrated Owner's Manual are located in the appendix of the
printed quick reference for the vehicle.
Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive.
BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
© 2012 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English II/12, 03 12 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 294.
6 Notes
At a glance
12 Cockpit
16 iDrive
22 Voice activation system
25 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Controls
30 Opening and closing
46 Adjusting
55 Transporting children safely
58 Driving
70 Displays
82 Lamps
87 Safety
99 Driving stability control systems
105 Driving comfort
131 Climate control
136 Interior equipment
143 Storage compartments
Driving tips
150 Things to remember when driving
153 Loading
155 Saving fuel
Navigation
160 Navigation system
Entertainment
180 Tone
183 Radio
191 CD/multimedia
Communication
214 Telephone
226 Office
235 Contacts
237 ConnectedDrive
Mobility
246 Refueling
248 Fuel
249 Wheels and tires
257 Engine compartment
259 Engine oil
261 Coolant
262 Maintenance
264 Replacing components
270 Breakdown assistance
275 Care
Reference
282 Technical data
285 Short commands of the voice activation
system
294 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Any updates made after the editorial deadline for
the Owner's Manuals are located in the appen‐
dix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle.
Additional sources of information
Should you have any questions, your service
center will be glad to advise you at any time.
Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is
available on the Internet: bmwusa.com.
Symbols
Indicates precautions that must be followed
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of per‐
sonal injury and serious damage to the vehicle.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of informa‐
tion.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to se‐
lect individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice ac‐
tivation system.
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Refers to measures that can be taken to help
protect the environment.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the rele‐
vant section of this Owner's Manual for infor‐
mation on a particular part or assembly.
Vehicle equipment
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
all standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series.
Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, equipment is
also described and illustrated that is not availa‐
ble in your vehicle, e.g. because of the selected
optional equipment or the country-specific var‐
iants.
This also applies for safety-related functions
and systems.
For options and equipment not described in this
Owner's Manual, please refer to the Supple‐
mentary Owner's Manuals.
On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are
arranged differently than shown in the illustra‐
tions.
Status of the Owner's Manual
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol‐
icy of constant development that is conceived
to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody
the highest quality and safety standards. In rare
cases, therefore, the features described in this
Owner's Manual may differ from those in your
vehicle.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Any updates made after the editorial deadline for
the Owner's Manuals are located in the appen‐
dix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle.
For your own safety
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics, re‐
Seite 6
Notes
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
quires suitable maintenance and repair meth‐
ods.
Therefore, have this work performed only by a
BMW center or a workshop that works accord‐
ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐
ately trained personnel.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.
Parts and Accessories
For your own safety, use genuine parts and ac‐
cessories approved by BMW. When you pur‐
chase accessories tested and approved by
BMW and Genuine BMW Parts, you simultane‐
ously acquire the assurance that they have been
thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum
performance when installed on your vehicle.
BMW warrants these parts to be free from de‐
fects in material and workmanship. BMW will not
accept any liability for damage resulting from in‐
stallation of parts and accessories not approved
by BMW. BMW cannot test every product made
by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used
on a BMW safely and without risk to either the
vehicle, its operation, or its occupants. Genuine
BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and other prod‐
ucts approved by BMW, together with profes‐
sional advice on using these items, are available
from all BMW centers. Installation and operation
of non-BMW approved accessories such as
alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors,
wheels, suspension components, brake dust
shields, telephones, including operation of any
mobile phone from within the vehicle without
using an externally mounted antenna, or trans‐
ceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie-
talkies, ham radios or similar accessories, may
cause extensive damage to the vehicle, com‐
promise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's
electrical system or affect the validity of the
BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center
for additional information. Maintenance, re‐
placement, or repair of the emission control de‐
vices and systems may be performed by any au‐
tomotive repair establishment or individual
using any certified automotive part.
California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to state the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile
components and parts, including components
found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, con‐
tain or emit chemicals known to the State of Cal‐
ifornia to cause cancer and birth defects and re‐
productive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your
hands after handling. Used engine oil contains
chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory
animals. Always protect your skin by washing
thoroughly with soap and water.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
▷ California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to deliver
the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is op‐
erated under those conditions. If you wish to op‐
erate your vehicle in another country or region,
Seite 7
Notes
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
you may be required to adapt your vehicle to
meet different prevailing operating conditions
and homologation requirements. You should
also be aware of any applicable warranty limita‐
tions or exclusions for such country or region. In
such case, please contact Customer Relations
for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road
safety, operational reliability and the New Vehi‐
cle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ures:
▷ BMW Maintenance system
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in serious
damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not cov‐
ered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited War‐
ranty.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the Na‐
tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe‐
rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about mo‐
tor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone
the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehi‐
cle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
Seite 8
Notes
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Seite 9
Notes
9
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted
with the available control concepts and options.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Cockpit
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
All around the steering wheel
1 Roller sunblind 43
2 Safety switch for the windows and the roller
sunblind in the rear 43
3 Power windows 42
4 Exterior mirror operation 52
5 Driver assist systems
Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion 97
Collision warning 111
Lane departure warning 95
Night Vision with pedestrian de‐
tection 126
Head-up Display 129
6 Lamps
Front fog lamps 85
Parking lamps 82
Low beams 82
Seite 12
At a glance Cockpit
12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Automatic headlamp con‐
trol 83
Daytime running lights 83
Adaptive light control 84
High-beam Assistant 84
Instrument lighting 85
7 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 64
High beams, head‐
lamp flasher 64
High-beam Assistant 84
Roadside parking lamps 83
Computer 77
8 Shift paddles 68
9 Steering wheel buttons, left
Store speed 113, 105
Resume speed 114, 107
Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐
ing 105
Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐
ing 113
Increase distance 107
Reduce distance 107
Cruise control rocker switch 114, 106
10 Instrument cluster 70
11 Steering wheel buttons, right
Entertainment source
Volume
Voice activation 22
Telephone 214
Thumbwheel for selection lists 76
12 Steering column stalk, right
Windshield wipers 64
Rain sensor 65
Clean the windshields and head‐
lamps 65
13 Start/stop the engine and switch
the ignition on/off 59
14 Automatic Engine Start/Stop
Function 59
15 Horn
16 Steering wheel heating 54
17 Adjust the steering wheel 54
18 Unlocking the hood
19 Open the trunk lid 38
Seite 13
Cockpit At a glance
13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
All around the center console
1 All around the interior rearview mir‐
ror 15
2 Control Display 16
3 Glove compartment 143
4 Air vent 134
5 Hazard warning system 270
Central locking system 37
6 Radio 183
CD/multimedia 191
7 Automatic climate control 131
8 Controller with buttons 16
9 Parking brake 61
Automatic Hold 62
10 PDC Park Distance Control 115
Top View 120
Backup camera 117
Parking assistant 122
Side View 121
11 Driving Experience Switch 102
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 99
12 Transmission selector lever
Seite 14
At a glance Cockpit
14
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
iDrive
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
The concept
The iDrive combines the functions of a multitude
of switches. Thus, these functions can be oper‐
ated from a central location.
Using the iDrive during a trip
To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu‐
pants and to other road users, never attempt to
use the controls or enter information unless traf‐
fic and road conditions allow this.◀
Controls at a glance
Controls
1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and create the settings.
Control Display
Notes
▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the care
instructions.
▷ Do not place objects close to the Control
Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
be damaged.
Switching off
1. Press the button.
2. "Switch off control display"
Switching on
Press the controller again to switch the screen
back on.
Controller
Select menu items and create settings.
1.
Turn.
Seite 16
At a glance iDrive
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
2. Press.
3. Move in four directions.
Buttons on controller
Press the button Function
MENU Open the main menu.
RADIO Opens the Radio menu.
CD Opens the CD/Multimedia
menu.
NAV Opens the Navigation
menu.
TEL Opens the Telephone
menu.
BACK Displays the previous
panel.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
Operating concept
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the main
menu.
Selecting menu items
Menu items shown in white can be selected.
1.
Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the controller.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
"Settings".
Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
▷ Move the controller to the left.
Seite 17
iDrive At a glance
17
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
The current panel is closed and the previous
panel is displayed.
The previous panel is opened again by
pressing the BACK button. In this case, the
current panel is not closed.
▷ Move the controller to the right.
A new panel is opened on top of the previous
display.
White arrows pointing to the left or right indicate
that additional panels can be opened.
View of an opened menu
When a menu is opened, it generally opens with
the panel that was last selected in that menu. To
display the first panel of a menu:
▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly
until the first panel is displayed.
▷ Press the menu button on the controller
twice.
Opening the Options menu
Press the button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Additional options: move the controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is dis‐
played.
Options menu
The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen".
This area remains unchanged.
▷ Control options for the selected main menu,
e.g., for "Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".
Changing settings
1.
Select a field.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
3. Press the controller.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
The function is activated.
The function is deactivated.
Seite 18
At a glance iDrive
18
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Example: setting the clock
Setting the clock
1. Press the button. The main menu is
displayed.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
to display "Time/Date".
4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
6. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
Status information
Status field
The following information is displayed in the sta‐
tus field at the top right:
▷ Time.
▷ Current entertainment source.
▷ Sound output, on/off.
▷ Wireless network reception strength.
▷ Telephone status.
▷ Traffic bulletin reception.
Status field symbols
The symbols are grouped as follows.
Radio symbols
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio™ is switched on.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Telephone symbols
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Wireless network reception
strength Symbol flashes: searching
for network.
Wireless network is not available.
Bluetooth is switched on.
Roaming is active.
Seite 19
iDrive At a glance
19
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Symbol Meaning
Text message was received.
Check the SIM card.
SIM card is blocked.
SIM card is missing.
Enter the PIN.
Entertainment symbols
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD player.
Music collection.
Gracenote® database.
AUX-IN port.
USB audio interface.
Mobile phone audio interface.
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Spoken instructions are switched off.
Request of the current vehicle posi‐
tion.
Split screen
General information
Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, e.g., information
from the onboard computer.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when you change to another menu.
Switching the split screen on and off
1. Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
Selecting the display
1. Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the controller until the split screen is
selected.
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen
content".
5. Select the desired menu item.
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐
tions, phone numbers and entry points into the
menu.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Saving a function
1.
Highlight the function via the iDrive.
2. Press the desired button for more
than 2 seconds.
Seite 20
At a glance iDrive
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Running a function
Press the button.
The function will run immediately. This
means, for example, that the number is dialed
when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the button assignment
Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
The key assignment is displayed at the top edge
of the screen.
▷ To display short information: touch the but‐
ton.
▷ To display detailed information: touch the
button for an extended period.
Deleting the button assignments
1.
Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for
approx. five seconds.
2. "OK"
Entering letters and numbers
General information
1.
Turn the controller: select letters or num‐
bers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete the letter
or number.
Press the controller for an extended
period: delete all letters or numbers.
Enter a blank space.
Switching between cases, letters and
numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case, letters
and numbers:
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or Move the controller up.
Entry comparison
Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
narrowed down every time a letter is entered and
letters may be added automatically.
The entries are continuously compared to the
data stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during the en‐
try for which data is available.
▷ Destination search: town/city names can be
entered using the spelling of language avail‐
able on the Control Display.
Seite 21
iDrive At a glance
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Voice activation system
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
The concept
▷ Most functions that are displayed on the
Control Display can be operated by spoken
commands via the voice activation system.
The system prompts you to make your en‐
tries.
▷ Functions that can only be used when the
vehicle is stationary cannot be operated us‐
ing the voice activation system.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's
Manual to use with the voice activation sys‐
tem.
Requirements
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system
so that the spoken commands can be identified.
Set the language, refer to page 80.
Using voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
The command is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is active.
If no other commands are available, operate the
function in this case via iDrive.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Briefly press the button on the steering
wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Possible commands
Most menu items on the Control Display can be
voiced as commands.
The available commands depend on which
menu is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
There are short commands for functions of the
main menu.
Some list entries, e.g. Phone book entries, can
also be selected via the voice activation system.
Speak these list entries exactly as they are dis‐
played in the respective list.
Having possible commands read aloud
You can have the available commands read out
loud for you: ›Voice commands‹
For example, if the "Settings" menu is displayed,
the commands for the settings are read out loud.
Executing functions using short
commands
Functions on the main menu can be performed
directly by means of short commands, nearly ir‐
Seite 22
At a glance Voice activation system
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
respective of which menu item is currently se‐
lected, e.g., ›Vehicle status‹.
List of short commands of the voice activation
system, refer to page 285.
Help dialog for the voice activation
system
Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹
Additional commands for the help dialog:
▷ ›Help with examples‹: information about the
current operating options and the most im‐
portant commands for them are announced.
▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information
about the principle of operation for the voice
activation system is announced.
Example: playing back a CD
1.
Switch on the Entertainment sound output
if necessary.
2. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›C D and multimedia‹
The medium last played is played back.
4. ›C D track ...‹ e.g., CD track 4.
Setting the voice dialog
You can set whether the system should use the
standard dialog or a shorter version.
In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the an‐
nouncements from the system are issued in an
abbreviated form.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"
4. Select the setting.
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button while giving an instruc‐
tion until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Notes on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to initiate
an Emergency Request. In stressful situations,
the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
unnecessarily delay the establishment of a tel‐
ephone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 270, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
▷ When selecting a radio station, use the com‐
mon pronunciation of the station name:
Seite 23
Voice activation system At a glance
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
›Station ...‹ e. g. Classic Radio station
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Seite 24
At a glance Voice activation system
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle
The integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played on the Control Display. The equipment
and functions that are in the vehicle are descri‐
bed therein.
Components of the integrated Owner's
Manual
The integrated Owner's Manual consists of
three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐
mation or access possibilities.
Quick Reference Guide
Located in the Quick Reference is important in‐
formation for the operation of the vehicle, the
operation of basic vehicle functions or for what
to do in the event of a flat tire. This information
can also be displayed during driving.
Search by pictures
Information and descriptions based on illustra‐
tions can be searched via search by pictures.
This is helpful, for example, if the description of
an outfitting package that cannot be named is
needed.
Owner's Manual
Information and descriptions can be searched
by direct entry of a search term via the index.
Select components
1. Press the button.
2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle Info".
3. Press the controller.
4. Selecting desired range:
▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "Search by pictures"
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Leafing through the Owner's Manual
Page by page with link access
Turn the controller until the next or previous
page is displayed.
Page by page without link access
Leaf through the pages directly while skipping
the links.
Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press
the controller to leaf from page to page.
Leaf back.
Leaf forward.
Context help - Owner's Manual to the
temporarily selected function
The relevant information can be opened directly.
Seite 25
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Opening during operation via iDrive
To move directly from the application on the
Control Display to the options menu:
1. Press the button or move the controller
to the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on the
Control Display:
"Display Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the
Owner's Manual
To change from a function, e.g., radio, to the
Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to
switch between the two displays:
1.
Press the button or move the controller
to the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4. Press the button again to return to the
function displayed last.
5. Press the button to return to the page
of the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To switch back and forth repeatedly between
the function displayed last and the page of the
Owner's Manual displayed last, repeat steps 4
and 5. This opens a new panel every time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly.
Storing
1. "Owner's Manual" Select via the iDrive.
2. Press the desired button for more
than 2 seconds.
Executing
Press the button.
The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐
mediately.
Seite 26
At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Seite 27
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information that will give you complete control of
your vehicle. All features and accessories that are
useful for driving and your safety, comfort and
convenience are described here.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Opening and closing
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Remote control/key
Buttons on the remote control
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Trunk lid
4 Panic mode, headlamp courtesy delay fea‐
ture
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote controls
with keys.
Every remote control contains a replaceable
battery.
The settings called up and implemented when
the vehicle is unlocked depend on which remote
control is used to unlock the vehicle, Personal
Profile, refer to page 31.
In addition, information about service require‐
ments is stored in the remote control, Service
data in the remote control, refer to page 262.
Integrated key
Press the button on the back of the remote con‐
trol, arrow 1, and pull out the key, arrow 2.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
▷ Driver's door.
▷ Storage compartment in the front center
armrest.
The storage compartment contains a switch for
separately securing the trunk lid, refer to
page 39.
Replacing the battery
1.
Take the integrated key out of the remote
control.
2. Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1.
3. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐
ment; see arrow 2.
Seite 30
Controls Opening and closing
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
4. Insert a battery of the same type with the
positive side facing upwards.
5. Press the cover closed.
Take the used battery to a recycling cen‐
ter or to your service center.
New remote controls
You can obtain new remote controls from your
service center.
Loss of the remote controls
Lost remote controls can be blocked by your
service center.
Emergency detection of remote control
It is possible to switch on the ignition or start the
engine in situations such as the following:
▷ Interference of radio transmission to remote
control by external sources.
▷ Discharged battery in the remote control.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by mobile
devices in close proximity to the remote
control.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by
charger while charging items such as mobile
devices in the vehicle.
A Check Control message is displayed if an at‐
tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start
the engine.
Starting the engine in case of
emergency detection of remote control
If a corresponding Check Control message ap‐
pears, hold the remote control, as shown,
against the marked area on the steering column
and press the Start/Stop button within 10 sec‐
onds while pressing the brake.
Personal Profile
The concept
Personal Profile concept
You can set several of your vehicle's functions
to suit your personal needs and preferences.
▷ The settings are automatically saved in the
profile currently activated.
▷ When the vehicle is unlocked, the profile that
was last detected and called up with the re‐
mote control is used.
▷ Your personal settings will be recognized
and called up again even if the vehicle has
been used in the meantime by someone else
with another remote control.
The individual settings are stored for three Per‐
sonal Profiles and one guest profile.
Transmitting the settings
Your personal settings can be taken with you to
another vehicle equipped with the Personal Pro‐
file function. For more information, contact your
service center.
Transmission takes place via:
Seite 31
Opening and closing Controls
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
▷ The USB interface, refer to page 143, in the
glove compartment onto a USB device.
Profile management
Opening the profiles
A different profile can be called up than the one
associated with the remote control currently in
use.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Select a profile.
The profile that is opened is assigned to the re‐
mote control currently in use.
Renaming profiles
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
The current profile is selected.
3. "Options" Open.
4. "Rename current profile"
Resetting profiles
The settings of the active profile are reset to
their default values.
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. "Settings"
3. "Profiles"
The current profile is selected.
4. "Options" Open.
5. "Reset current profile"
Importing profiles
Existing settings and contacts are overwritten
with the imported profile.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Import profile"
4. USB interface, refer to page 143: "USB
device"
Exporting profiles
Most settings of the active profile and the saved
contacts can be exported.
This can be useful for storing and opening per‐
sonal settings, e.g. if settings are accidentally
changed or deleted.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Export profile"
4. USB interface, refer to page 143: "USB
device"
Seite 32
Controls Opening and closing
32
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Using the guest profile
The guest profile can be used to make individual
settings without affecting the three Personal
Profiles.
This can be useful for drivers who are using the
vehicle temporarily and do not have their own
profile.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. The current profile is selected.
4. Open "Guest".
5. Create the settings.
Note: the guest profile cannot be renamed.
Display profile list during start
The profile list can be displayed during each
start for selecting the desired profile.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Options" Open.
4. "Display user list at startup"
Personal Profile settings
The following functions and settings can be
stored in a profile.
More information on the settings can be found
under:
▷ Active Cruise Control: collision warning.
▷ Exterior mirror position.
▷ CD/Multimedia: audio source listened to
last.
▷ Driving Experience Switch: sport program.
▷ Driver's seat position: automatic retrieval af‐
ter unlocking.
▷ Programmable memory buttons: assign‐
ment.
▷ Head-up Display: selection, brightness, po‐
sition and rotation of the display.
▷ Headlamp courtesy delay feature: time set‐
ting.
▷ Tone: tone settings.
▷ Automatic climate control: settings.
▷ Steering wheel position.
▷ Navigation: map views, route criteria, voice
output on/off.
▷ Night Vision with pedestrian detection: se‐
lection of functions and type of display.
▷ Park Distance Control PDC: adjusting the
signal tone volume.
▷ Radio: stored stations, station listened to
last, special settings.
▷ Backup camera: selection of functions and
type of display.
▷ Side View: selection of the display type.
▷ Language on the Control Display.
▷ Lane departure warning: last setting, on/off.
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection: last setting, on/
off.
▷ Daytime running lights: current setting.
▷ Triple turn signal activation.
▷ Locking the vehicle: after a brief period or
after starting to drive.
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system becomes active
when the driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and re‐
leases the locks on the following:
▷ Doors.
▷ Trunk lid.
▷ Fuel filler flap.
Operating from the outside
▷ Via the remote control.
▷ Via the driver's door lock.
Seite 33
Opening and closing Controls
33
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
▷ Via the door handles.
▷ Via the button in the trunk lid.
The following takes place simultaneously when
locking/unlocking the vehicle via the remote
control:
▷ Depending on how the vehicle is equipped,
the theft protection is activated/deactivated.
Theft protection prevents the doors from
being unlocked using the lock buttons or the
door opener.
▷ The welcome lamps, interior lamps and
courtesy lamps are switched on and off.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 40, is
armed or disarmed.
Operating from the inside
Via the button for the central locking system.
If the vehicle has been locked from inside, the
fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
central locking system unlocks automatically.
The hazard warning system and interior lamps
come on.
Opening and closing: from the
outside
Using the remote control
General information
Take the remote control with you
People or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐
side. Always take the remote control with you
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can
then be opened from the outside.◀
Unlocking
Press the button on the remote control.
The vehicle is unlocked.
Welcome lamps, interior lamp and courtesy
lamps are switched on.
You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Unlock button:"
4. Select the desired function:
▷ "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐
locks the entire vehicle.
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Seite 34
Controls Opening and closing
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Convenient opening
The remote control can be used to simultane‐
ously open the windows and the glass sunroof.
Press and hold the button on the re‐
mote control.
The windows are opened, the glass sunroof is
tilted and the sliding visor moves back.
Releasing the button stops the motion.
Locking
Press the button on the remote control.
Locking from the outside
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be
unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
edge.◀
Switching on interior lamps and
courtesy lamps
Press the button on the remote control
with the vehicle locked.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button on the remote control
for at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Switching on the headlamp courtesy
delay feature
Briefly press the button on the remote
control.
The duration can be set in the Control Display.
Opening the trunk lid
Press the button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second.
The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether it was
previously locked or unlocked.
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up.
Ensure that adequate clearance is available be‐
fore opening.
In some vehicle equipment variants, the trunk lid
can only be opened using the remote control if
the vehicle was unlocked first.
To avoid locking yourself out of the vehicle, do
not place the remote control into the cargo area.
The trunk lid is locked again as soon as it is
pushed closed.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
1.
"Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma‐
tion signals.
▷ "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"
▷ "Flash when lock/unlock"
Retrieving the seat, mirror, and
steering wheel settings
The driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steering
wheel positions selected last are stored for the
currently used remote control.
When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions
are automatically retrieved if this function was
activated.
Seite 35
Opening and closing Controls
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Pinch hazard when moving back the seat
If this function is used, first make sure that
the footwell behind the driver's seat is empty.
Otherwise, people can be injured or objects
damaged when the seat is moved back.◀
The adjustment procedure is interrupted:
▷ When a seat position switch is pressed.
▷ When a button of the seat, mirror, and steer‐
ing wheel memory is pressed briefly.
Activating the setting
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Last seat position auto."
Malfunction
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or un‐
locked with the remote control, the battery may
be discharged or there may be interference from
external sources such as mobile phones, metal
objects, overhead power lines, transmission
towers, etc.
If this occurs, unlock or lock the vehicle at the
door lock using the integrated key.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is governed
by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ LX8766S.
▷ LX8766E.
▷ LX8CAS.
▷ LX8CAS2.
▷ MYTCAS4.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐
ence, and
▷ this device must accept any interference re‐
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Using the door lock
General information
Locking from the outside
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be
unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
edge.◀
Remove the key before pulling the door
handle
Before pulling the outside door handle, remove
the key to avoid damaging the paintwork and the
key.◀
In some country-specific versions, the alarm
system is triggered if the vehicle is unlocked via
the door lock.
Seite 36
Controls Opening and closing
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle
with the remote control, or switch on the igni‐
tion, if necessary, by emergency detection of the
remote control.
In some vehicle equipment versions, only the
driver's door can be unlocked or locked via the
door lock.
Locking the doors and trunk lid at once
To lock all doors and the trunk lid at once:
1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle using
the button for the central locking system in
the interior.
2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas‐
senger door.
3. Lock the vehicle.
▷ Lock the driver's door using the
integrated key in the door lock, or
▷ Press down the lock button of the front
passenger door and close the door from
the outside.
The fuel filler flap can only be locked using the
remote control.
Manual operation
If an electrical malfunction occurs, lock or unlock
the vehicle using the integrated key via the door
lock on the driver's door.
Opening and closing: from the
inside
Locking and unlocking
Pressing the buttons locks and unlocks the
doors and the trunk lid when the front doors are
closed, but they are not secured against theft.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Unlocking and opening
▷ Either unlock the doors together using the
button for the central locking system and
then pull the door handle above the armrest
or
▷ Pull the door opener twice individually on
each door: the first time unlocks the door,
the second time opens it.
Automatic locking
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. Select the desired function:
▷ "Lock if no door is opened"
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if a door is not
opened.
▷ "Lock after start. to drive"
Seite 37
Opening and closing Controls
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive away.
Doors
Automatic Soft Closing
To close the doors, push lightly.
It is closed automatically.
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the
doors is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Trunk lid
Opening
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up.
Ensure that adequate clearance is available be‐
fore opening.
Opening from the outside
▷ Press on the top half of the BMW emblem.
If the backup camera is activated, push the
swiveled out BMW emblem further up to
open the trunk lid.
▷ Press the button on the remote
control for approx. 1 second.
Opening from the inside
Push the button in the driver's footwell.
If the vehicle is stationary, the trunk lid opens if
it is not locked.
Closing
Recessed grips in the interior trim of the trunk
lid make it easier to pull down the lid.
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the
trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the remote
control is locked inside the vehicle when the
trunk lid is closed.◀
Seite 38
Controls Opening and closing
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Locking the vehicle
Press the button on the inside of the trunk lid.
When the driver's door is closed, the vehicle is
completely locked.
Locking separately
The trunk lid can be locked separately using the
switch in the front center armrest.
▷ Trunk lid secured, arrow 1.
▷ Trunk lid not secured, ar‐
row 2.
Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. This
secures the trunk lid and disconnects it from the
central locking system.
When the center armrest is locked, the trunk lid
cannot be opened.
This is beneficial when the vehicle is parked us‐
ing valet service. The infrared remote control
can be handed out without the key.
Emergency unlocking
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.
The trunk lid unlocks.
Comfort Access
The concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activating
the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote control
with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is nearby or in the passenger
compartment.
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
▷ Convenient closing.
▷ Unlocking of the trunk lid separately.
▷ Starting the engine.
Functional requirements
▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐
ence nearby.
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control must
be located outside of the vehicle.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
▷ The engine can only be started if the remote
control is inside the vehicle.
Comparison with ordinary remote
control
The functions can be controlled by pressing the
buttons of the remote control or Comfort Ac‐
cess.
Seite 39
Opening and closing Controls
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Unlocking
Fully grasp a door handle, arrow 1. This corre‐
sponds to pressing the button on the remote
control.
Locking
Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with
your finger for approx. 1 second.
This corresponds to pressing the button on
the remote control.
To save battery power, ensure that the ignition
and all electronic systems and/or power con‐
sumers are switched off before locking the ve‐
hicle.
Convenient closing
Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with
the finger and hold it down.
In addition to locking, the windows and the glass
sunroof are closed.
Monitor the closing process
Monitor the closing process to ensure that
no one becomes trapped.◀
Unlocking the trunk lid separately
Press on the top half of the BMW emblem on the
trunk lid.
This corresponds to pressing the
button
on the remote control.
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the remote
control is locked inside the vehicle when the
trunk lid is closed.◀
Malfunction
Comfort Access may not function properly if it
experiences interference from external sources
such as mobile phones, metal objects, overhead
power lines, transmission towers, etc.
In this case, open or close the vehicle using the
buttons on the remote control or use the
integrated key in the door lock.
Alarm system
The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds to:
▷ Opening of a door, the hood or the trunk lid.
▷ Movements in the vehicle.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐
tempts to steal a wheel or when towing the
car.
▷ Interruptions in battery voltage.
The alarm system briefly indicates tampering:
▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning system.
▷ By flashing the high beams.
Seite 40
Controls Opening and closing
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Arming and disarming the alarm
system
General information
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with
the remote control, Comfort Access or at the
door lock the alarm system is armed or disarmed
at the same time.
Door lock and armed alarm system
Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the alarm
on some country-specific versions.
In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle
with the remote control or switch on the ignition,
if necessary, by emergency detection of the re‐
mote control.
Trunk lid and armed alarm system
The trunk lid can be opened using the remote
control, even if the alarm system is armed.
Press the button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second.
After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and
monitored again by the alarm system. The haz‐
ard warning system flashes once.
In some vehicle equipment variants, the trunk lid
can only be opened using the remote control if
the vehicle was unlocked first.
Panic mode
Press the button on the remote control
for at least 3 seconds.
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote control.
▷ With Comfort Access: if you are carrying the
remote control with you, pull on the door
handle.
Indicator lamp on the interior rearview
mirror
▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The system is armed.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
The doors, hood or trunk lid is not closed
properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐
cured.
After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp flashes
continuously. Interior motion sensor and tilt
alarm sensor are not active.
▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the engine is started, but no longer than
approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is
towed.
Interior motion sensor
The windows and glass sunroof must be closed
for the system to function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
can be switched off together, such as in the fol‐
lowing situations:
Seite 41
Opening and closing Controls
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
▷ In automatic car washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on car-carrying trains, at
sea or on a trailer.
▷ When animals are to remain in the vehicle.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle
is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.
Power windows
General information
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot operate the power windows and injure
themselves.◀
Opening
▷ Press the switch to the resistance
point.
The window opens while the switch is held.
▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The window opens automatically.
Pressing again stops the motion.
Convenient opening, refer to page 35, via the
remote control.
Closing
Danger of pinching
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the window is clear;
otherwise, injuries may result.◀
▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point.
The window closes while the switch is held.
▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window closes automatically.
Pressing the switch stops the motion.
Convenient operation, refer to page 35, via the
remote control.
Convenient closing, refer to page 40, with Com‐
fort Access.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a
window closes, the closing action is interrupted.
The window reopens slightly.
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
tection
Even with the pinch protection system, check
that the window's closing path is clear; other‐
wise, the closing action may not stop in certain
situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀
No window accessories
Do not install any accessories in the range
of movement of the windows; otherwise, the
pinch protection system will be impaired.◀
Seite 42
Controls Opening and closing
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Closing without the pinch protection
system
Danger of pinching
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the window is clear;
otherwise, injuries may result.◀
For example, if there is an external danger or if
ice on the windows prevents a window from
closing normally, proceed as follows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and
hold it there.
Pinch protection is limited and the window
reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds
a certain value.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance point
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there.
The window closes without pinch protec‐
tion.
Safety switch
The following functions can be locked simulta‐
neously, using the switch:
▷ Opening and closing of the rear windows
using the switches in the rear.
▷ Operation of the roller sunblinds using the
switches in the rear.
Switching on and off
Press the button.
The LED lights up if the safety function
is switched on.
Safety switch for rear operation
Press the safety switch when transporting
children in the rear; otherwise, injury may result
if the windows are closed without supervision.◀
Roller sunblinds
General information
The safety switch in the driver's door can be
used to prevent children, for example, from op‐
erating the roller blinds using the switches in the
rear.
Press the safety switch in the driver's door. The
LED lights up if the safety function is switched
on.
If you are no longer able to move the roller blinds
after having activated them consecutively a
number of times, the system is blocked for a
limited time to prevent overheating. Let the sys‐
tem cool.
The roller sunblinds cannot be moved at low in‐
terior temperatures.
Driver's door controls
Roller blind for rear window
Press the button.
Rear door controls
Seite 43
Opening and closing Controls
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Roller blind for the side windows
Press the button.
The roller blind can only be extended or re‐
tracted when the side window is closed.
Roller blind for rear window
Press the button.
Raising and lowering the roller blinds
together
Press and hold the button.
Glass sunroof, powered with
tilt function
General information
The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐
tion is switched on.
Danger of pinching
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is
clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot operate the roof and injure themselves.◀
Tilting up and closing glass sunroof
▷ Push switch upward briefly.
The closed roof is tilted and
the sliding visor opens
slightly.
▷ Briefly press out the switch
twice in succession toward
the rear past the resistance
point.
Closed roof is raised and the
sliding visor moves all the
way back.
▷ To close the switch, press upward briefly or
twice forward past the resistance point.
Convenient operation, refer to page 35, via the
remote control.
Convenient closing, refer to page 40, with Com‐
fort Access.
Opening/closing the sliding visor
▷ Press the switch in the de‐
sired direction to the resist‐
ance point and hold it there.
The sliding visor moves while
the switch is being held.
▷ Press the switch in the desired direction
past the resistance point.
The sliding visor moves automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a
glass sunroof closes, the closing action is inter‐
rupted.
The sunroof is tilted again.
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
tection
Despite the pinch protection system, check that
the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise, the
closing action may not be interrupted in certain
Seite 44
Controls Opening and closing
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
extreme situations, such as when thin objects
are present.◀
Closing without the pinch protection
system
If there is an external danger or if, e. g., icing of
the glass sunroof prevents automatic closing,
push the switch forward past the resistance
point and hold it.
The roof closes without pinch protection.
Initializing after a power failure
After a power failure during the opening or clos‐
ing process, the roof can only be operated to a
limited extent.
Initializing the system
The system can be initialized when the vehicle
is stationary and the engine is running.
During the initialization, the roof closes without
pinch protection.
Danger of pinching
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is
clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Press the switch up and hold it
until the initialization is complete:
▷ Initialization begins within
15 seconds and is completed
when the sunroof and sliding
visor are completely closed.
▷ The roof closes without pinch protection.
Seite 45
Opening and closing Controls
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Adjusting
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Sitting safely
The ideal seating position can make a vital con‐
tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
The seating position plays an important role in
an accident in combination with:
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 49.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 51.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 87.
Seats
Adjusting
General information
Do not adjust the seat while driving
Do not adjust the driver's seat while driv‐
ing, or the seat could respond with unexpected
movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle con‐
trol could lead to an accident.◀
Do not incline the backrest too far to the
rear
Also on the front passenger side, do not incline
the backrest on the front passenger side too far
to the rear during driving, or there is a risk of
slipping under the safety belt in the event of an
accident. This would eliminate the protection
normally provided by the belt.◀
Middle seat
The 6 series Gran Coupé is designed as a 4+1-
seater vehicle. The middle seat is of limited use‐
fulness. It is recommended that this seat only be
used by persons who can use the backrest as a
substitute for the head restraint.
Adjusting the head restraints, refer to
page 51.
At a glance
1 Active seat
2 Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory
3 Backrest width
4 Lumbar support
5 Backrest, head restraint
6 Shoulder support
7 Forward/back, height, tilt
8 Thigh support
Note
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored for
the remote control currently in use. When the
vehicle is unlocked via the remote control, the
position is automatically retrieved if the Func‐
tion, refer to page 35, for this is activated.
Seite 46
Controls Adjusting
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Adjustments in detail
1. Forward/back.
2. Height.
3. Seat tilt.
4. Backrest tilt.
Thigh support
Multifunctional seat
Adjust the position using the lever.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in such a way that it supports the lumbar
region of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
▷ Press the front/rear section of
the switch.
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the switch.
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Backrest width
Change the width of the backrest
using the side wings to adjust the
lateral support.
To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle,
the backrest width temporarily opens fully.
Seite 47
Adjusting Controls
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Shoulder support
Also supports the back in the shoulder area:
▷ Results in a relaxed seating position.
▷ Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles.
Active seat
Active adjustment of the seat cushion's con‐
tours reduces muscular tension and fatigue to
help prevent lower back pain.
Press the button. The LED lights up.
Changing the seat position
Requirements
▷ Vehicle at a standstill.
▷ Driver's door or front passenger's door is
open.
When the door is open, the seat is accessi‐
ble from the side on which the door is open.
Controls
Press and hold the button until the seat has
moved to the desired position. Releasing the
button stops the motion.
Front seat heating
Switching on
Press the button once for each temper‐
ature level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the drive is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐
cally with the temperature selected last.
Switching off
Press the button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Seite 48
Controls Adjusting
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Temperature distribution
The heating action in the seat cushion and back‐
rest can be distributed in different ways.
1. "Climate"
2. "Seat heating distribution"
3. Select the required seat.
4. Turn the controller to set the temperature
distribution.
Rear seat heating
Switching on
Press the button once for each temper‐
ature level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the drive is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐
cally with the temperature selected last.
Switching off
Press the button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Active seat ventilation, front
The seat cushion and backrest surfaces are
cooled by means of integrated fans.
The ventilation rapidly cools the seat, e. g., if the
vehicle interior is overheated or for continuous
cooling at high temperatures.
Switching on
Press the button once for each ventila‐
tion level.
The highest level is active when three LEDs are
lit.
If when the seat ventilation is turned on the Max‐
imum Cooling function is activated, the seat
ventilation automatically switches to the highest
level. When the Maximum Cooling function is
switched off, the unit switches back to the pre‐
viously set level.
After a short time, the system automatically
moves down one level in order to prevent ex‐
cessive cooling.
Switching off
Press the button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Safety belts
Seats with safety belt
The vehicle has five seats, each of which is
equipped with a safety belt.
Seite 49
Adjusting Controls
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Notes
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving away.
Although airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
▷ The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be
correct for adult seat occupants of every
build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
▷ The two outer safety belt buckles,
integrated into the rear seat, are for passen‐
gers sitting on the left and right.
▷ The center rear seat belt buckle is solely in‐
tended for the center passenger.
One person per safety belt
Never allow more than one person to wear
a single safety belt. Never allow infants or small
children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀
Putting on the belt
Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly
across the lap and shoulders, as close to the
body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies low
around the hips in the lap area and does not
press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt can
slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal im‐
pact and injure the abdomen.
The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub
on sharp edges, be routed over solid or breaka‐
ble objects, or be pinched.◀
Reduction of restraining effect
Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the
belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulder
belt periodically to readjust the tension across
your lap; otherwise, the retention effect of the
safety belt may be reduced.◀
Buckling the belt
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the
belt buckle.
Unbuckling the belt
1.
Hold the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the belt back into its reel.
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat
and front passenger seat
The indicator lamp flashes or lights up
and a signal sounds. Make sure that the
safety belts are positioned correctly.
The safety belt reminder is active at speeds
above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be ac‐
tivated if objects are placed on the front pas‐
senger seat.
Damage to safety belts
In the case of strain caused by accidents or
damage:
Have the safety belts, including the safety belt
tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors
checked.
Checking and replacing safety belts
Have the work performed only by your
service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured
that this safety feature will function properly.◀
Seite 50
Controls Adjusting
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of
an accident.
Adjusting the head restraint
If possible, correctly adjust the head re‐
straints of all occupied seats; otherwise, there is
an increased risk of injury in an accident.◀
Front
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is ap‐
proximately at ear level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
as close as possible to the back of the head.
Active head restraint
In the event of a rear-end collision with a certain
severity, the active head restraint automatically
reduces the distance from the head.
Reduced protective function
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint cov‐
ers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
on the head restraints.
▷ Only attach accessories approved by BMW
to the seat or head restraint.
Otherwise, the protective function of the active
head restraint will be impaired and the personal
safety of the occupants will be endangered.◀
Adjusting the height
Adjusting electrically.
Distance to the back of the head
▷ Forward: pull.
▷ Back: press the button and push the head
restraint toward the rear.
Adjusting the side extensions
Fold forward for increased lateral support in the
resting position.
Removing
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Seite 51
Adjusting Controls
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Seat, mirror, and steering
wheel memory
General information
Two different driver's seat, exterior mirror, and
steering wheel positions can be stored and re‐
trieved for each remote control. The adjustment
of the lumbar support is not stored.
Storing
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Set the desired position.
3. Press the button. The LED in the
button lights up.
4. Press the desired button 1 or 2. The LED
goes out.
If the M button is pressed accidentally:
Press the button again.
The LED goes out.
Calling up settings
Do not retrieve the memory while driving
Do not retrieve the memory setting while
driving, as an unexpected movement of the seat
or steering wheel could result in an accident.◀
Comfort function
1.
Open the driver's door.
2. Switch off the ignition.
3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2.
The corresponding seat position is performed
automatically.
The procedure stops when a switch for adjust‐
ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.
Safety mode
1. Close the driver's door or switch on the ig‐
nition.
2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2 until
the adjustment procedure is completed.
Calling up of a seat position
deactivated
After a brief period, the calling up of stored seat
positions is deactivated to save battery power.
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
▷ Open or close the door or trunk lid.
▷ Press a button on the remote control.
▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
At a glance
1 Adjusting
2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Fold in and out
General information
The mirror on the passenger side is more curved
than the driver's side mirror.
Seite 52
Controls Adjusting
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Estimating distances correctly
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. Do not estimate the distance
to the traffic behind you based on what you see
in the mirror, as this will increase your risk of an
accident.◀
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the
mirror setting is stored for the remote control in
use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the remote
control, the position is automatically retrieved if
the setting for this function is active.
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the mirror changeover switch.
Adjusting electrically
The setting corresponds to the direction
in which the button is pressed.
Storing positions
Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer
to page 52.
Adjusting manually
If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example,
press the edges of the mirror glass.
Automatic Curb Monitor
When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror
glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas‐
senger side. This improves your view of the curb
and other low-lying obstacles when parking, for
example.
Activating
1.
Slide the mirror changeover switch
to the driver's side mirror position.
2. Engage transmission position R.
Deactivating
Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas‐
senger's side mirror position.
Fold in and out
Press the button.
Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h.
For example, this is advantageous
▷ In car washes.
▷ In narrow streets.
▷ For folding back mirrors that were folded
away manually.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Fold in the mirror in a car wash
Before entering an automatic car wash,
fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the
button; otherwise, they could be damaged, de‐
pending on the width of the vehicle.◀
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the engine is running.
Automatic dimming feature
Both exterior mirrors are automatically dimmed.
Photocells are used for control in the Interior rear
view mirror, refer to page 54.
Seite 53
Adjusting Controls
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Interior rearview mirror, automatic
dimming feature
The concept
Photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Functional requirement
For proper operation:
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
General information
Do not adjust while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement
could result in an accident.◀
Adjusting
The steering wheel can be adjusted in four di‐
rections.
Storing the position
Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer
to page 52.
Assistance getting in and out
The steering wheel temporarily moves into the
highest position to make it easier to enter and
exit the vehicle.
Steering wheel heating
Switching on/off
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Seite 54
Controls Adjusting
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Transporting children safely
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
The right place for children
Note
Children in the vehicle
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐
selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the
doors.◀
Children should always be in the rear
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the back seat.
Transporting children in the rear
Only transport children younger than
13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the
rear in child restraint fixing systems provided in
accordance with the age, weight and size of the
child; otherwise, there is an increased risk of in‐
jury in an accident.
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
fixing system can no longer be used, due to their
age, weight and size.◀
Children on the front passenger seat
Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐
straint fixing system in the front passenger seat,
make sure that the front, knee and side airbags
on the front passenger side are deactivated. Au‐
tomatic deactivation of front passenger airbags,
refer to page 89.
Deactivating the front passenger airbags
If a child restraint fixing system is used in
the front passenger seat, the front passenger
airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is
an increased risk of injury to the child when the
airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint
fixing system.◀
Installing child restraint fixing
systems
Notes
Manufacturer's information for child re‐
straint fixing systems
To select, mount and use child restraint fixing
systems, observe the information provided by
the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro‐
tective effect can be impaired.◀
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
After installing a child restraint fixing system in
the front passenger seat, make sure that the
front, knee and side airbags on the front pas‐
senger side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front passenger airbags auto‐
matically, refer to page 89.
Deactivating the front passenger airbags
If a child restraint fixing system is used in
the front passenger seat, the front passenger
airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is
an increased risk of injury to the child when the
airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint
fixing system.◀
Seite 55
Transporting children safely Controls
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint fixing system,
move the front passenger seat as far back as
possible and adjust its height to the highest po‐
sition to obtain the best possible position for the
belt and to offer optimal protection in the event
of an accident.
Do not change the seat position and height after
this.
Backrest width
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
child restraint fixing system in the front passen‐
ger seat, open the backrest width completely.
Do not change the backrest width again and do
not call up a memory position.
Backrest width for the child seat
Before installing a child restraint fixing
system in the front passenger seat, the backrest
width must be opened completely. Do not
change the adjustment after this; otherwise, the
stability of the child seat will be reduced.◀
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
safety belt can be locked against pulling out for
mounting the child restraint fixing systems.
Locking the safety belt
1.
Pull out the belt webbing completely.
2. Secure the child restraint fixing system with
the belt.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and
pull it taut against the child restraint fixing
system. The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1. Unbuckle the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint fixing system.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.
Note
Manufacturer's information for LATCH
child restraint fixing systems
To mount and use the LATCH child restraint fix‐
ing systems, observe the operating and safety
information from the system manufacturer; oth‐
erwise, the level of protection may be reduced.◀
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
Correctly engage the lower LATCH an‐
chors
Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have
properly engaged and that the child restraint fix‐
ing system is resting snugly against the back‐
rest; otherwise, the degree of protection offered
may be reduced.◀
Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix‐
ing system, pull the belt away from the child re‐
straint fixing system.
Seite 56
Controls Transporting children safely
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Mounts for the lower ISOFIX anchors are lo‐
cated behind the seat cover between the back‐
rest and the seat cushion.
Open the slide fastener to access the anchors.
Mounting LATCH child restraint fixing
systems
1.
Mount the child restraint fixing system; refer
to the operating instructions of the system.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Child restraint fixing system with a
tether strap
LATCH mounting eyes
Only use the mounting eyes for the upper
LATCH retaining strap to secure child restraint
fixing systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes
could be damaged.◀
Mounting points
There are three mounting points for child re‐
straint fixing systems with a tether strap.
Retaining strap guide
Retaining strap
Make sure the upper retaining strap does
not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it
passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the strap
will not properly secure the child restraint fixing
system in the event of an accident.◀
1 Direction of travel
2 Upper retaining strap
3 Head restraint.
4 Rear window shelf
5 Mounting point/eye
6 Hook for upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the mounting point
1.
Lift the cover over the mounting point.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap over the
head restraint.
3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
mounting eye.
4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down.
Seite 57
Transporting children safely Controls
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Driving
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Start/Stop button
The concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches the ignition on or off and
starts the engine.
The engine starts if the brake
pedal is pressed when you press
the Start/Stop button.
Ignition on
Press the Start/Stop button, and do not press on
the brake pedal at the same time.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Most of the indicator and warning lamps in the
instrument cluster light up for varying lengths of
time.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
The ignition switches off automatically:
▷ When the vehicle is locked, if the low beams
are switched on.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started.
▷ If the engine is switched off and the ignition
is switched on, the system automatically
switches to the radio ready state when the
door is opened if the lights are switched off
or the daytime running lights are switched
on.
Ignition off
Press the Start/Stop button again, and do not
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go
out.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Transmission position P with the ignition
off
When the ignition is switched off, position P is
engaged automatically. When in an automatic
car wash, for example, ensure that the ignition is
not switched off accidentally.◀
Ignition automatically cuts off while the vehicle
is stationary and the engine is stopped:
▷ During locking, also with the low beams ac‐
tivated.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started. This function is only available when
the low beams are switched off.
▷ When opening and closing the driver door, if
the driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the
low beams are switched off.
▷ While the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, if
the driver's door is open and the low beams
are switched off.
When the ignition is switched off, by opening or
closing the driver's door or unbuckling the driv‐
er's seat belt, the radio ready state remains ac‐
tive.
Radio ready state
Activate radio ready state:
Seite 58
Controls Driving
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
▷ When the ignition is switched off: press ON/
OFF button on the radio.
▷ When the engine is running: press the Start/
Stop button.
Some electronic systems/power consumers re‐
main ready for operation.
Radio ready state switches off automatically:
▷ After approx. 8 minutes.
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the central
locking system.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started.
Starting the engine
Automatic transmission
Starting the engine
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a cer‐
tain time and is stopped as soon as the engine
starts.
Engine stop
General information
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot start the engine.◀
Set the parking brake and further secure
the vehicle as required
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐
erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward
and downward inclines, further secure the vehi‐
cle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in
the direction of the curb. ◀
Before driving into a car wash
In order for the vehicle to be able to roll into a car
wash, heed the information regarding Washing
in automatic car washes, refer to page 275.
Automatic transmission
Switching off the engine
1. Engage transmission position P with the ve‐
hicle stopped.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
The radio ready state is switched on.
3. Set the parking brake.
Auto Start/Stop function
The concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, e.g., in a traffic congestion or at traffic
lights. The ignition remains switched on. The
engine starts again automatically for driving off.
Certain vehicle components may experience
additional wear as a result of this system.
Automatic mode
The Auto Start/Stop function is operational after
each engine start.
The function is activated above a certain speed.
▷ Automatic transmission: from 5 mph, ap‐
prox. 9 km/h.
Engine stop
The engine is switched off automatically during
a stop under the following conditions:
Automatic transmission:
▷ The selector lever is in transmission position
D.
Seite 59
Driving Controls
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
▷ The brake pedal remains pressed while the
vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is held by
Automatic Hold.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.
The air flow of the air conditioner is reduced
when the engine is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The display indicates that the
Auto Start/Stop function is ready
for an automatic engine start.
Note
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations:
▷ External temperature below approx.
+37 ℉/+3 ℃.
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐
matic climate control is running.
▷ The passenger compartment has not yet
been heated or cooled to the required level.
▷ The engine is not yet at operating tempera‐
ture.
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steer‐
ing wheel is being turned.
▷ After driving in reverse.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the automatic
climate control is switched on.
▷ The vehicle battery charge is very low.
▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked.
▷ The parking assistant is activated.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
▷ The transmission selector lever is in position
N or S/M.
Starting the engine
The engine starts automatically under the fol‐
lowing conditions:
▷ Automatic transmission:
By releasing the brake pedal.
When Automatic Hold is activated: press the
accelerator.
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it
will not start again automatically if any one of the
following conditions are met.
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the
driver's door is open.
▷ The hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lamps light up for varying
lengths of time.
The engine can only be started via the Start/
Stop button.
Note
Even if driving away was not intended, the de‐
activated engine starts up automatically in the
following situations:
▷ Excessive warming of the passenger com‐
partment when the cooling function is
switched on.
▷ The steering wheel is turned.
▷ Automatic transmission: the transmission
position is changed from D to N, R, or M/S.
▷ Automatic transmission: the transmission
position is changed from P to N, D, R, or M/
S.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the automatic
climate control is switched on.
▷ The vehicle battery charge is very low.
▷ Excessive cooling of the passenger com‐
partment when the heating is switched on.
Seite 60
Controls Driving
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Preventing an automatic engine stop
with automatic transmission
The concept
To make it possible to drive away very quickly,
such as at an intersection, the automatic engine
stop can be actively prevented.
Preventing an engine stop using the
brake pedal
The engine stop can be actively prevented
within one second after the vehicle comes to a
standstill.
▷ Immediately after the vehicle comes to a
standstill, briefly press the brake pedal
forcefully.
▷ Then press the brake pedal with normal
braking force.
Activating/deactivating the system
manually
Using the button
Press the button.
▷ LED comes on: Auto Start Stop function is
deactivated.
The engine is started during an automatic
engine stop.
The engine can only be stopped or started
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ LED goes out: Auto Start Stop function is
activated.
Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle
can be switched off permanently, e.g., when
leaving it.
1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated.
Transmission position P is engaged auto‐
matically.
2. Set the parking brake.
Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.
Automatic deactivation
In certain situations, the Automatic Engine Start/
Stop Function is deactivated automatically for
safety reasons, such as when the driver is de‐
tected to be absent.
Malfunction
The automatic engine start/stop function no lon‐
ger switches of the engine automatically. A
Check Control message is displayed. It is pos‐
sible to continue driving. Have the system
checked.
Parking brake
The concept
The parking brake is primarily intended to pre‐
vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it
brakes the rear wheels.
Seite 61
Driving Controls
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Setting
Pull the switch.
The LED lights up.
The indicator lamp lights up red. The
parking brake is set.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
models
Set the parking brake and further secure
the vehicle as required
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐
erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward
and downward inclines, further secure the vehi‐
cle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in
the direction of the curb. ◀
While driving
Use while driving serves as an emergency brak‐
ing function:
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes
hard while the button is being pulled.
The indicator lamp lights up red, a signal
sounds and the brake lamps light up.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
models.
If the vehicle is braked to a speed of approx.
2 mph/3 km/h, the parking brake remains set.
Releasing
With the ignition switched on:
Automatic transmission: Press the switch
while the brake is pressed or transmission
position P is engaged.
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
The parking brake is released.
Automatic Release
For automatic release, operate the accelerator
pedal.
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
Subject to the following requirements, the park‐
ing brake is automatically released by operation
of the accelerator pedal:
▷ Engine on.
▷ Drive position engaged.
▷ Driver buckled in and doors closed.
Inadvertent operation of the accelerator
pedal
Make sure that the accelerator pedal is not op‐
erated unintentionally; otherwise, the vehicle is
set in motion and there is a risk of an accident.◀
Automatic Hold
The concept
This system assists the driver by automatically
setting and releasing the brake, such as when
moving in stop-and-go traffic.
The vehicle is automatically held in place when
it is stationary.
On inclines, the system prevents the vehicle
from rolling backward when driving away.
For your safety
Under the following conditions, Automatic Hold
is automatically deactivated and the parking
brake is set:
▷ The engine is switched off.
▷ A door is opened and driver's safety belt is
unbuckled while the vehicle is stationary.
▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a standstill
using the parking brake.
Seite 62
Controls Driving
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
The indicator lamp switches from green
to red and the letters AUTO H go out.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
models.
Leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning, engage position P of the automatic trans‐
mission and ensure that the parking brake is set.
Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀
Activating
This function can be activated when the driver's
door is closed and the safety belt is fastened,
and while driving.
Press the button.
The LED and the letters AUTO H light
up.
The indicator lamp lights up.
Automatic Hold is activated.
Deactivating
Press the button again.
The LED and the letters AUTO H go
out.
Automatic Hold is deactivated.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
press on the brake pedal to deactivate it.
When the parking brake is set manually, Auto‐
matic Hold is deactivated automatically.
Driving
Automatic Hold is activated: the vehicle is auto‐
matically secured against rolling when it stops.
The indicator lamp lights up green.
Step on the accelerator pedal to drive
off.
The brake is released automatically.
The indicator lamp goes out.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models
Before driving into a car wash
Deactivate Automatic Hold; otherwise, the
parking brake will be set when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary and the vehicle will no longer be able to
roll.◀
Parking
The parking brake is automatically set if the en‐
gine is switched off while the vehicle is being
held by Automatic Hold.
The indicator lamp changes from green
to red.
The parking brake is not set if the engine
is switched off while the vehicle is coast‐
ing to a halt. Automatic Hold is deacti‐
vated.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models
Automatic Hold remains activated during an en‐
gine stop brought about by the Auto Start/Stop
function.
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot release the parking brake.◀
Malfunction
In the event of a failure or malfunction of the
parking brake, secure the vehicle against rolling
using a wheel chock, for example, when leaving
it.
Seite 63
Driving Controls
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Turn signal, high beams,
headlamp flasher
Turn signal
Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To switch off manually, press the lever to the re‐
sistance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp in‐
dicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever to the resistance point.
The turn signal flashes three times.
The function can be activated or deactivated:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal to
flash.
High beams, headlamp flasher
▷ High beams, arrow 1.
▷ Headlamp flasher, arrow 2.
Washer/wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and brief
wipe
Do not switch on the wipers if frozen
Do not switch on the wipers if they are fro‐
zen onto the windshield; otherwise, the wiper
blades and the windshield wiper motor may be
damaged.◀
Switching on
Press the wiper levers up.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
Seite 64
Controls Driving
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
▷ Normal wiping speed: press up once.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
▷ Fast wiping speed: press up twice or press
once beyond the resistance point.
The wipers switch to normal speed when the
vehicle is stationary.
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the wiper levers down.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Brief wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
Rain sensor
The concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐
shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir‐
ror.
Activating/deactivating
Press the button on the wiper lever.
The LED in the steering column stalk lights up.
Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes
Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
through an automatic car wash; otherwise, dam‐
age could be caused by undesired wiper activa‐
tion.◀
Rain sensor, sensitivity
Turn the thumbwheel.
Clean the windshield, headlamps
Pull the lever.
Seite 65
Driving Controls
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
In addition, the headlamps are cleaned at regular
intervals when the vehicle lights are switched
on.
Do not use the washer system at freezing
temperatures
Do not use the washers if there is any danger
that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth‐
erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this
reason, use antifreeze.
Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is
empty; otherwise, you could damage the
pump.◀
Windshield washer nozzles
The washer jets are automatically heated when‐
ever the ignition is switched on.
Fold-out position of the wipers
Required when changing the wiper blades or
under frosty conditions, for example.
1.
Switch off the ignition.
2. Under frosty conditions, ensure that the
wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind‐
shield.
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of
resistance and hold it for approx. 3 seconds,
until the wiper remains in a nearly vertical
position.
After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper
system must be reactivated.
Fold the wipers back down
Before switching the ignition on, fold the
wipers back down to the windshield; otherwise,
the wipers may become damaged when they are
switched on.◀
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the wiper levers down. The wipers
move to their resting position and are ready
for operation.
Washer fluid
General information
Antifreeze for washer fluid
Antifreeze is flammable. Therefore, keep
it away from sources of ignition.
Only keep it in the closed original container and
inaccessible to children.
Follow the instructions on the container.◀
Washer fluid reservoir
Adding washer fluid
Only add washer fluid when the engine is
cool, and then close the cover completely to
avoid contact between the washer fluid and hot
engine parts.
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk
to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐
voir.
Fill with water and – if required – with a washer
antifreeze, according to the manufacturer's rec‐
ommendations.
Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain
the correct mixing ratio.
For the capacity, refer to technical data.
Seite 66
Controls Driving
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic
Transmission positions
D Drive, automatic position
Position for normal vehicle operation. All for‐
ward gears are available.
R is Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
N is Neutral
Use in automatic car washes, for example. The
vehicle can roll.
When the ignition is switched off, refer to
page 58, position P is engaged automatically.
P Park
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The
drive wheels are blocked.
P is engaged automatically:
▷ After the engine is switched off, if the car is
in radio ready state, refer to page 58, or if the
ignition is switched off, refer to page 58, and
if position R or D is engaged.
▷ With the ignition is off, if position N is en‐
gaged.
▷ If the safety belt is unbuckled, the driver's
door is opened, and the brake pedal is not
pressed while the vehicle is stationary and
transmission position R or D is engaged.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that posi‐
tion P of the automatic transmission is engaged.
Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Press on the gas pedal beyond the
resistance point at the full throttle position.
Engaging the transmission position
▷ Transmission position P can only be disen‐
gaged if the engine is running and the brake
pedal is pressed.
▷ With the vehicle stationary, press on the
brake pedal before shifting out of P or N;
otherwise, the shift command will not be
executed: shift lock.
Depress the brake until you start driv‐
ing
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
you select a driving position, maintain pres‐
sure on the brake pedal until you are ready
to start.◀
Engaging D, R and N
Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐
rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary.
After releasing the selector lever, it returns to its
center position.
Press unlock button, in order to:
▷ Engage R.
▷ Shift out of P.
Seite 67
Driving Controls
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Engaging P
Press button P.
Sport program DS and manual mode M/
S
Activating sport program DS
Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐
mission position D.
DS is displayed in the instrument cluster.
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐
vated.
Activating the M/S manual mode
Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐
mission position D.
Push the selector lever forward or backward.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster, e.g., M1.
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards.
The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropriate
engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not shift
down if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Manual mode M/S: prevent automatic
upshifting
Once maximum engine speed is attained, M/S
manual mode is automatically upshifted as
needed.
For vehicles with Sport automatic transmis‐
sions, automatic shift operations are not per‐
formed if one of the following conditions is met:
▷ DSC deactivated.
▷ TRACTION activated.
▷ SPORT+ activated.
In addition, the kickdown is deactivated.
Ending the sport program/manual
mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles for Sport automatic
transmission
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are
used to shift gears in automatic mode, the trans‐
mission temporarily switches to manual mode.
If the shift paddles are not used and the vehicle
is not accelerated for a certain time, the system
Seite 68
Controls Driving
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
switches back into automatic mode if the selec‐
tor lever is in transmission position D.
▷ Shift up: pull right shift paddle.
▷ Shift down: pull left shift paddle.
The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropriate
engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not shift
down if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The transmission position is dis‐
played, e.g.: P.
Seite 69
Driving Controls
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Displays
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Instrument cluster
1 Fuel gauge 74
2 Speedometer
3 Indicator/warning lamps 72
4 Tachometer 74
5 Oil temperature 74
6 Electronic displays 71
7 Reset miles 74
Seite 70
Controls Displays
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Electronic displays
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Messages, e.g. Check Control 71
Time 74
Date 75
2 Range 75
3 Computer 77
4 Navigation display 160
Service requirements 75
Miles/trip miles 74
5 Selection list, such as for the radio 76
Current fuel consumption 75
Energy recovery 75
External temperature 74
Transmission display 69
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control system monitors functions
in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in
the monitored systems.
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lamps and
text messages in the instrument cluster and in
the Head-up Display.
In addition, an acoustic signal may be output and
a text message may appear on the Control Dis‐
play.
Seite 71
Displays Controls
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Indicator/warning lamps
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Overview: indicator/warning lamps
Symbol Function or system
Turn signal
Parking brake
Parking brake in Canadian models
Automatic Hold
Front fog lamps
High beams
High-beam Assistant
Parking lamps, headlamp control
Symbol Function or system
Active Cruise Control
Vehicle detection, Active Cruise
Control
Cruise control
Lane departure warning
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
DSC Dynamic Stability Control or
DTC Dynamic Traction Control
Tire Pressure Monitor
Flat Tire Monitor
Safety belts
Airbag system
Steering system
Emissions
Emissions in Canadian models
Brake system
Brake system in Canadian models
Seite 72
Controls Displays
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Symbol Function or system
ABS Antilock Brake System
ABS Antilock Brake System in Cana‐
dian models
At least one Check Control message
is displayed or is stored
Text messages
Text messages in combination with a symbol in
the instrument cluster explain a Check Control
message and the meaning of the indicator and
warning lamps.
Supplementary text messages
Addition information, such as on the cause of a
fault or the required action, can be called up via
Check Control.
The supplementary text of urgent messages is
displayed on the Control Display automatically.
Symbols
Depending on the Check Control message, the
following functions can be selected.
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Display additional information about the
Check Control message in the integrated
owner's manual.
▷ "Service request"
Contact the service partner.
▷ "Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the computer button on the turn signal
lever.
▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐
played continuously and are not cleared un‐
til the malfunction is eliminated. If several
malfunctions occur at once, the messages
are displayed consecutively.
These messages can be hidden for approx.
8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐
played again automatically.
▷ Other Check Control messages are hidden
automatically after approx. 20 seconds.
They are stored and can be displayed again
later.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the text message.
Messages after trip completion
Special messages that are displayed during
driving are displayed again after the ignition is
switched off.
Seite 73
Displays Controls
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Fuel gauge
The vehicle inclination may
cause the display to vary.
Notes on refueling, refer to
page 246.
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in
the red warning field. In this
range, the fuel supply is inter‐
rupted to protect the engine.
Engine oil temperature
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at
the low temperature end.
Drive at moderate engine and
vehicle speeds.
▷ Normal operating tempera‐
ture: the pointer is in the mid‐
dle or in the left half of the
temperature display.
▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high tem‐
perature end. A Check Control message is
displayed in addition.
Coolant temperature
Should the coolant, and with it the engine, be‐
come too hot, a Check Control message is dis‐
played.
Check the coolant level, refer to page 261.
Odometer and trip odometer
▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.
Display/reset miles
Press the knob.
▷ When the ignition is switched
off, the time, external temper‐
ature and odometer are dis‐
played.
▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip
odometer is reset.
External temperature
External temperature warning
If the display drops to
+37 ℉/+3 ℃, a signal sounds.
A Check Control message is dis‐
played.
There is the increased danger of
ice.
Ice on roads
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃,
there can be a risk of ice on roads.
Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shady
roads, for example, to avoid the increased dan‐
ger of an accident.◀
Time
The time is displayed at the bot‐
tom of the instrument cluster.
Setting the time and time format,
refer to page 79.
Seite 74
Controls Displays
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Date
The date is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
Setting the date and date format,
refer to page 80.
Range
After the reserve range is
reached:
▷ A Check Control message is
displayed briefly.
▷ The remaining range is
shown on the onboard com‐
puter.
▷ When a dynamic driving style is used, such
as when cornering quickly, operation of the
engine is not always ensured.
The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
Refuel promptly
Refuel no later than at a range of
30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine is not
ensured and damage may occur.◀
Displaying the cruising range
1.
"Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. "Additional indicators"
The range is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Range when destination guidance is
activated in the navigation system
When destination guidance is ac‐
tivated in the navigation system,
the range up to the destination is
displayed.
Current fuel consumption
Displays the current fuel con‐
sumption. You can check
whether you are currently driving
in an efficient and environmen‐
tally-friendly manner.
Displaying the current fuel
consumption
1. "Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. "Additional indicators"
The bar display for the current fuel consumption
is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Energy recovery
The kinetic energy of the vehicle
is converted to electrical energy
while coasting. The vehicle bat‐
tery is partially charged and fuel
consumption can be reduced.
Service requirements
Display
The driving distance or the time
to the next scheduled mainte‐
nance is displayed briefly after
the ignition is switched on.
The current service require‐
ments can be read out from the remote control
by the service specialist.
Data regarding the maintenance status or legally
mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐
matically transmitted to your service center be‐
fore a service due date, Automatic Service Re‐
quest, refer to page 238.
Seite 75
Displays Controls
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Display.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
tion.
Symbols
Symbols Description
No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or a le‐
gally mandated inspection is
approaching.
The service deadline has al‐
ready passed.
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the required inspections.
Ensure that the vehicle date and time are set
correctly.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
6. Create the settings.
7. Confirm.
The entered date is stored.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the maintenance status or legally
mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐
matically transmitted to your service center be‐
fore a service due date.
You can check when your service center was
notified.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
Selection lists in the
instrument cluster
The concept
The following can be operated using the buttons
and the thumbwheel on the steering wheel:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Redial on telephone.
▷ Activation of the voice activation system.
Seite 76
Controls Displays
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Activating a list and adjusting the
setting
On the right side of the steering wheel, turn the
thumbwheel to activate the corresponding list.
Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set‐
ting and confirm it by pressing the thumbwheel.
Computer
Indication in the info display
The information from the on‐
board computer is shown in the
info display in the instrument
cluster.
Calling up information on the info
display
Press the onboard computer button on the turn
signal lever.
Information is displayed on the info display of the
instrument cluster.
Information at a glance
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn sig‐
nal lever calls up the following information on the
info display:
▷ Range.
▷ Average fuel consumption.
▷ Average speed.
▷ Date.
▷ Time of arrival.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Distance to destination.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Arrow view of navigation system.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
When the arrow view in the Head-up Display
is inactive.
▷ ECO PRO bonus range.
Adjusting the info display
You can select what information from the on‐
board computer is to be displayed on the info
display of the instrument cluster.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. Select the desired displays.
Information in detail
Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
It is calculated based on your driving style over
the last 20 miles/30 km. If there is only enough
fuel left for less than 45 miles/80 km, the color
of the display changes.
Seite 77
Displays Controls
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Average fuel consumption
This is calculated for the period during which the
engine is running.
The average fuel consumption is calculated on
the basis of various distances.
Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
engine manually stopped do not enter into the
calculation of the average speed.
Resetting average values
Press and hold the computer button on the turn
signal lever.
Distance to destination
The distance remaining to the destination is dis‐
played if a destination is entered in the naviga‐
tion system before the trip is started.
The distance to the destination is adopted au‐
tomatically.
Time of arrival
The estimated time of arrival is
displayed if a destination is en‐
tered in the navigation system
before the trip is started.
The time must be correctly set.
Speed limit
Display of a speed limit which, when reached,
should cause a warning to be issued.
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
drops below the set speed limit once by at least
3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the
limit
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is
displayed.
5. Press the controller.
The speed limit is stored.
Activating/deactivating the limit
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning"
4. Press the controller.
Applying your current speed as the
limit
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed"
4. Press the controller.
The current vehicle speed is stored as the
limit.
Trip computer
There are two types of computer.
▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as
often as necessary.
▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an over‐
view of the current trip.
Resetting the trip computer
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset": all values are reset.
Seite 78
Controls Displays
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
"Automatically reset": all values are reset
approx. 4 hours after the vehicle comes to a
standstill.
Display on the Control Display
Display the computer or trip computer on the
Control Display.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Resetting the fuel consumption or
speed
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info"
3. "Cons." or "Speed"
4. "Yes"
Settings on the Control
Display
Time
Setting the time zone
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time zone"
4. Select the desired time zone.
The time zone is stored.
Setting the time
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed.
5. Press the controller.
6. Turn the controller until the desired minutes
are displayed.
7. Press the controller.
The time is stored.
Setting the time format
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The time format is stored.
Seite 79
Displays Controls
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Date
Setting the date
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed.
5. Press the controller.
6. Make the necessary settings for the month
and year.
The date is stored.
Setting the date format
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The date format is stored.
Language
Setting the language
To set the language on the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:"
4. Select the desired language.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Setting the voice dialog
Voice dialog for the voice activation system, re‐
fer to page 23.
Units of measure
Setting the units of measure
To set the units for fuel consumption, route/dis‐
tance and temperature:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Seite 80
Controls Displays
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Brightness
Setting the brightness
To set the brightness of the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
5. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness control may not be clearly visible.
Seite 81
Displays Controls
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Lamps
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
At a glance
1 Rear fog lamps
2 Front fog lamps
3 Automatic headlamp control, Adaptive Light
Control, High-beam Assistant, Welcome
lamps, Daytime running lights
4 Lamps off, daytime running lights
5 Parking lamps, daytime running lights
6 Low beams, welcome lamps, High-beam
Assistant
7 Instrument lighting
Parking lamps/low beams,
headlamp control
General information
Switch position: 0, ,
If the driver door is opened with the ignition
switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐
cally switched off at these switch settings.
Parking lamps
Switch position : the vehicle lamps light
up on all sides, e.g., for parking.
Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe‐
riods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐
charged and it would then be impossible to start
the engine.
When parking, it is preferable to switch on the
one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to
page 83.
Low beams
Switch position with the ignition switched
on: the low beams light up.
Welcome lamps
When parking the vehicle, leave the switch in
position or : the parking and interior
lamps light up briefly when the vehicle is un‐
locked.
Activating/deactivating
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Welcome light"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Seite 82
Controls Lamps
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Headlamp courtesy delay feature
The low beams stay lit for a short while after the
ignition is switched off, if the lamps are switched
off and the headlamp flasher is switched on.
Setting the duration
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Pathway light.: s"
4. Set the duration.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Automatic headlamp control
Switch position : the low beams are switched
on and off automatically, e.g., in tunnels, in twi‐
light or if there is precipitation. The indicator
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
The low beams always stay on when the fog
lamps are switched on.
Personal responsibility
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal judgment
in determining when the lamps should be
switched on in response to ambient lighting
conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you
should always switch on the lamps manually un‐
der these conditions.◀
Daytime running lights
With the ignition switched on, the daytime run‐
ning lights light up in position 0,
or .
After the ignition is switched off, the parking
lamps light up in position .
Activating/deactivating
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Roadside parking lamps
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Switching on
With the ignition switched off, press the lever
either up or down past the resistance point for
approx. 2 seconds.
Switching off
Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in
the opposite direction.
Seite 83
Lamps Controls
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Adaptive light control
The concept
Adaptive light control is a variable headlamp
control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
tion of the road surface.
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the light from the headlamp follows
the course of the road.
In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or
when turning, an additional, corner-illuminating
lamp is switched on that lights up the inside of
the curve when the vehicle is moving below a
certain speed.
Activating
Switch position
with the ignition switched
on.
The turning lamps are automatically switched
on depending on the steering angle or the use
of turn signals.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive
Light Control does not swivel to the driver's side
when the vehicle is at a standstill.
When driving in reverse, only the turning lamp is
active.
Self-leveling headlights
The self-leveling headlights feature adapts the
light distribution to the contours of the road.
The light distribution is lowered on hilltops to
avoid blinding oncoming traffic and tilted in de‐
pressions to increase visibility.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
Adaptive light control is malfunctioning or has
failed. Have the system checked as soon as pos‐
sible.
High-beam Assistant
The concept
When the low beams are switched on, this sys‐
tem automatically switches the high beams on
and off or suppresses the light in the areas that
blind oncoming traffic. The procedure is con‐
trolled by a sensor on the front of the interior
rearview mirror. The assistant ensures that the
high beams are switched on whenever the traffic
situation allows. The driver can intervene at any
time and switch the high beams on and off as
usual.
Activating
1.
Turn the light switch to or .
2. Press the button on the turn signal lever, ar‐
row.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up.
When the lights are switched on, the
high beams are switched on and off automati‐
cally.
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to ad‐
equate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
Seite 84
Controls Lamps
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Switching the high beams on and off
manually
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
▷ High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2.
The High-beam Assistant can be switched off
when manually adjusting the light. To reactivate
the High-beam Assistant, press the button on
the turn signal lever.
System limits
Personal responsibility
The high-beam assistant cannot serve as
a substitute for the driver's personal judgment
of when to use the high beams. Therefore, man‐
ually switch off the high beams in situations
where this is required to avoid a safety risk.◀
The system is not fully functional in situations
such as the following, and driver intervention
may be necessary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; and at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming
traffic on freeways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the pres‐
ence of highly reflective signs.
▷ At low speeds.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
Camera
The camera is located near the base of the mir‐
ror.
Keep windshield clean and clear in the area in
front of the interior rear view mirror.
Fog lamps
Front fog lamps
The parking lamps or low beams must be
switched on.
Press the button. The green indicator
lamp lights up.
If the automatic headlamp control, refer to
page 83, is activated, the low beams will come
on automatically when you switch on the front
fog lamps.
Instrument lighting
Adjusting
The parking lamps or low beams
must be switched on to adjust the
brightness.
Adjust the brightness using the
thumbwheel.
Seite 85
Lamps Controls
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Interior lamps
General information
The interior lamps, footwell lamps, entry lamps
and courtesy lamps are controlled automati‐
cally.
The brightness of some of these lamps is influ‐
enced by the thumbwheel for the instrument
lighting.
1 Interior lamps
2 Reading lamp
Switching the interior lamps on and off
Press the button.
To switch off permanently: press the button for
approx. 3 seconds.
Switch back on: press button.
Reading lamps
Press the button.
Reading lamps are located at the front and rear
next to the interior lamps.
The reading lamps in the rear can be adjusted
for optimal direction of the light beam.
With the interior lamps shut off, the reading
lamps cannot be switched on.
Bang & Olufsen High End Surround
Sound System
Adjusting speaker lighting, refer to page 181.
Seite 86
Controls Lamps
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Safety
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Head airbag
4 Side airbag
5 Knee airbags
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and front
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in
which safety belts alone cannot provide ade‐
quate restraint.
Side airbags
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.
Head airbags
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the
head.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
impact.
Seite 87
Safety Controls
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end
collisions.
Information on how to ensure the optimal
protective effect of the airbags
▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim, holding your hands at
the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep
the danger of injury to your hands or arms as
low as possible if the airbag is triggered.
▷ There should be no people, animals, or ob‐
jects between an airbag and a person.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Keep the dashboard and window on the
front passenger side clear, i.e., do not cover
with adhesive labels or coverings, and do not
attach holders such as for navigation instru‐
ments and mobile phones.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting
correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs
in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries can
occur if the front airbag is triggered.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not approved specifically for seats
with integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack‐
ets, over the backrests.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag and do not rest
against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries
can occur if the airbags are triggered.
▷ Do not remove the airbag restraint system.
▷ Do not remove the steering wheel.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, cover them or modify
them in any way.
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This
also applies to steering wheel covers, the
dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars and the
sides of the headliner.◀
Even when all instructions are followed closely,
injury from contact with the airbags cannot be
ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐
ing impairment in sensitive individuals.
In the case of a malfunction, deactivation
and after triggering of the airbags
Do not touch the individual components imme‐
diately after the system has been triggered; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of burns.
Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐
mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by
your service center or a workshop that has the
necessary authorization for handling explosives.
Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐
tem could lead to failure in an emergency or un‐
desired triggering of the airbag, either of which
could result in injury.◀
Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
Functional readiness of the airbag
system
When the ignition is switch on, the warn‐
ing lamp in the instrument cluster lights
up briefly and thereby indicates the op‐
erational readiness of the entire airbag system
and the belt tensioner.
Airbag system malfunctioning
▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the
ignition is turned on.
▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously.
Seite 88
Controls Safety
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
When there is a malfunction, have the air‐
bag system checked immediately
When there is a malfunction, have the airbag
system checked immediately; otherwise, there
is a risk that the system does not function as ex‐
pected in the event of an accident despite cor‐
responding severity of the accident.◀
Automatic deactivation of the front
passenger airbags
The system determines whether the front pas‐
senger seat is occupied by measuring the re‐
sistance of the human body.
The front, knee, and side airbag on the front
passenger side are activated or deactivated ac‐
cordingly.
Leave feet in the footwell
Make sure that the front passenger keeps
his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, the front
passenger airbags may not function properly.◀
Child restraint fixing system in the front
passenger seat
Before transporting a child on the front passen‐
ger seat, see the safety notes and instructions
under Children on the front passenger seat.◀
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults, the
front passenger airbags may be deactivated in
certain sitting positions. In this case, the indica‐
tor lamp for the front passenger airbags lights
up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front passenger airbags are activated and
the indicator lamp goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To make sure that the occupied seat cushion
can be evaluated correctly
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or
other items to the front passenger seat un‐
less they are specifically recommended by
the manufacturer of your vehicle.
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
passenger seat if a child restraint system is
to be installed on it.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
Indicator lamp for the front passenger
airbags
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐
bags indicates the operating state of the front
passenger airbags.
The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac‐
tivated or deactivated.
▷ The indicator lamp lights up
when a child who is properly
seated in a child restraint fix‐
ing system intended for that
purpose is detected on the
seat or the seat is empty. The
airbags on the front passen‐
ger side are not activated.
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
for example, a correctly seated person of
sufficient size is detected on the seat. The
airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐
tivated.
Detected child seats
The system generally detects children seated in
a child seat, especially in the child seats that
were required by NHTSA when the vehicle was
manufactured. After installing a child seat, make
Seite 89
Safety Controls
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
sure that the indicator lamp for the front pas‐
senger airbags lights up. This indicates that the
child seat has been detected and the front pas‐
senger airbags are not activated.
Strength of the driver's and front
passenger airbag
The strength with which the driver's and front
passenger airbags are triggered depends on the
position of the driver's and front passenger
seats.
To maintain the accuracy of this function over
the long-term, calibrate the front seats when a
corresponding message appears on the Control
Display.
Calibrating the front seats
A corresponding message appears on the Con‐
trol Display.
1.
Move the respective seat forward all the
way.
2. Move the respective seat forward again. It
moves forward briefly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when
the message on the Control Display disappears.
If the message continues to be displayed, repeat
the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a repeat
calibration, have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Unobstructed area of movement
Ensure that the area of movement of the
seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury or
damage to objects.◀
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The concept
The tire inflation pressure is measured in the
four mounted tires. The system notifies you if
there is a significant loss of pressure in one or
more tires.
Functional requirements
The system must have been reset when the in‐
flation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable
signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. Always use
wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the
system will operate properly. Reset the system
after each correction of the tire inflation pres‐
sure and after every tire or wheel change.
System limits
Sudden tire damage
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐
vance.◀
The system does not operate correctly if it has
not been reset. For example, a flat tire may be
indicated despite correct tire inflation pres‐
sures.
The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat
tire:
▷ For a mounted wheel without TPM electron‐
ics.
▷ When the TPM is disturbed by other sys‐
tems or devices with the same radio fre‐
quency.
Status display
The current status of the Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM can be displayed on the Control Display,
e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM"
The status is displayed.
Status display
The tire and system status is indicated by the
color of the tires.
Seite 90
Controls Safety
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
A change in the tire inflation pressure during
driving is taken into account.
A correction is only necessary if this is indicated
by the TPM
Wheels, green
The tire inflation pressure is equal to the target
state.
One wheel is yellow
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire.
All wheels are yellow
▷ A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure
in several tires.
▷ The system was not reset after a wheel
change and thus warns based on the infla‐
tion pressures initialized last.
▷ A flat tire in one or more tires while the sys‐
tem is being reset.
Wheels, gray
The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons for
this may be:
▷ TPM is being reset.
▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with the
same radio frequency.
▷ Malfunction.
For Canadian models: additional
information
The status display additionally shows the cur‐
rent tire inflation pressures and tire tempera‐
tures.
When correcting the tire inflation pressures,
note the following:
The tire pressure increases as the tire temper‐
ature increases.
Therefore, only correct the tire inflation pres‐
sure when the tire is at the ambient temperature.
Compare the displayed tire temperature with
the external temperature in the instrument clus‐
ter.
Resetting the system
Reset the system after each correction of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset"
4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
5. Reset the tire pressure using "Reset".
6. Drive away.
The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting
TPM..." is displayed.
After driving for a few minutes, the set tire infla‐
tion pressures are applied as set values. The re‐
setting process is completed automatically dur‐
ing driving. The tires are shown in green and
"TPM active" is shown on the Control Display.
The trip can be interrupted at any time. If you
drive away again, the process resumes auto‐
matically.
If a flat tire is detected during a reset, all tires are
displayed in yellow.
Low tire pressure message
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
▷ The system was not reset after a wheel
change and thus warns based on the infla‐
tion pressures initialized last.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with reg‐
ular tires or run-flat tires.
Seite 91
Safety Controls
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Run-flat tires, refer to page 255, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the tire sidewall.
Do not continue driving without run-flat
tires
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
may result in serious accidents.◀
When a low inflation pressure is indicated, DSC
Dynamic Stability Control is switched on if nec‐
essary.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
Do this by checking the air pressure in all
four tires.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
If an identification is not possible, please
contact the service center.
2. Rectify the flat tire.
Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility System,
may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In
this case, have the electronics checked at
the next opportunity and have them re‐
placed if necessary.
Run-flat tires
Maximum speed
You can continue driving with a damaged tire at
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the
next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load
and the driving style and conditions.
For a vehicle containing an average load, the
possible driving distance is approx.
50 miles/80 km.
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance, and altered self-steering
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐
ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance depends
on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the
actual distance may be smaller or greater de‐
pending on the driving speed, road conditions,
external temperature, cargo load, etc.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance and altered self-steering prop‐
erties.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed
and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could
come loose and cause an accident. Do not con‐
tinue driving, and contact your service center.◀
Seite 92
Controls Safety
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Message when the system was not
reset
A Check Control message is displayed.
The system detected a wheel change but was
not reset.
Warnings regarding the current tire inflation
pressure are not reliable.
Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the
system.
Malfunction
The yellow warning lamp flashes and
then lights up continuously. A Check
Control message is displayed. No flat
tire can be detected.
Display in the following situations:
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted:
have the service center check it if necessary.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by
your service center.
▷ TPM could not be fully reset. Reset the sys‐
tem again.
▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with the
same radio frequency: after leaving the area
of the disturbance, the system automatically
becomes active again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la‐
bel, you should determine the proper tire infla‐
tion pressure for those tires.) As an added safety
feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that il‐
luminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-in‐
flated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping
ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a sub‐
stitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been
equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not operating prop‐
erly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is com‐
bined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then re‐
main continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the mal‐
function indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for
a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re‐
placement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
FTM Flat Tire Monitor
The concept
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires.
It detects a pressure loss in a tire by comparing
the rotational speeds of the individual wheels
while moving.
Seite 93
Safety Controls
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and
therefore the rotational speed of the corre‐
sponding wheel change. This is detected and
reported as a flat tire.
Functional requirements
The system must have been initialized when the
tire inflation pressure was correct; otherwise,
reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. In‐
itialize the system after each correction of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
System limits
Sudden tire damage
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐
vance.◀
A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires can‐
not be detected. Therefore, check the tire infla‐
tion pressure regularly.
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface.
▷ Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels,
high lateral acceleration.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Status display
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g.,
whether or not the FTM is active.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Initialization
The initialization process adopts the set inflation
tire pressures as reference values for the detec‐
tion of a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐
firming the inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset"
4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
5. Start the initialization with "Reset".
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes.
Indication of a flat tire
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire
inflation pressure.
1.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with reg‐
ular tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 255, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the tire sidewall.
Do not continue driving without run-flat
tires
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
may result in serious accidents.◀
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control is switched on if necessary.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
Seite 94
Controls Safety
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Do this by checking the air pressure in all
four tires.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
been initialized. In this case, initialize the
system.
If an identification is not possible, please
contact the service center.
2. Rectify the flat tire.
Run-flat tires
Maximum speed
You can continue driving with a damaged tire at
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the
next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
been initialized. In this case, initialize the
system.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load
and the driving style and conditions.
For a vehicle containing an average load, the
possible driving distance is approx.
50 miles/80 km.
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance, and altered self-steering
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐
ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance depends
on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the
actual distance may be smaller or greater de‐
pending on the driving speed, road conditions,
external temperature, cargo load, etc.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance and altered self-steering prop‐
erties.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed
and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could
come loose and cause an accident. Do not con‐
tinue driving, and contact your service center.◀
Lane departure warning
The concept
Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts
you when the vehicle on streets with lane mark‐
ings is about to leave the lane. Depending on the
country-specific version of the vehicle, the
speed is between 35 mph/55 km/h and
45 mph/70 km/h. When switching on the system
below this speed, a message appears in the in‐
strument cluster.
The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in the
event of warnings. The time of the warning may
vary depending on the current driving situation.
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
Seite 95
Safety Controls
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Switching on/off
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The state is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Display
▷ Lines, arrow 1: the system is activated.
▷ Arrows, arrow 2: at least one lane marking
was detected and warnings can be issued.
Issued warning
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐
brating.
If the turn signal is set before changing the lane,
a warning is not issued.
End of warning
The warning ends:
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
▷ When returning to your own lane.
▷ When braking hard.
▷ When using the turn signal.
System limits
Personal responsibility
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver's personal judgment of the course
of the road and the traffic situation.
In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steering
wheel, as you may lose control of the vehicle.◀
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In the event of worn, poorly visible, merging,
diverging, or multiple lane markings such as
in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
ice, dirt or water.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by ob‐
jects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ When the windshield behind the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
Camera
The camera is located near the base of the mir‐
ror.
Seite 96
Controls Safety
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Keep windshield clean and clear in the area in
front of the interior rear view mirror.
Active Blind Spot Detection
The concept
Two radar sensors below the rear bumper mon‐
itor the area behind and next to the vehicle at
speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
The system indicates whether there are vehicles
in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from
behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
The lamp in the exterior mirror housing lights up
dimly.
Before you change lanes after setting the turn
signal, the system issues a warning in the situa‐
tions described above.
The lamp in the housing of the exterior mirror
flashes and the steering wheel vibrates.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The system can issue warnings at speeds above
approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
The state is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Display
Information stage
The dimmed lamp in the mirror housing indi‐
cates when there are vehicles in the blind spot
or approaching from behind.
Warning
If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the
critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly
and the lamp in the mirror housing flashes
brightly.
The warning stops when the turn signal is
switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the crit‐
ical zone.
System limits
Personal responsibility
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic
situation.
In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steering
wheel, as you may lose control over the vehi‐
cle.◀
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
Seite 97
Safety Controls
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located under the rear
bumper.
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ Dirty or icy bumper.
▷ Stickers on the bumper.
A Check Control message is displayed when the
system is not fully functional.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is governed
by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ NBG009014A.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐
ence, and
▷ this device must accept any interference re‐
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Brake force display
The concept
▷ During normal brake application, the outer
brake lamps light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
brake lamps light up in addition.
Seite 98
Controls Safety
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Antilock Brake System ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak‐
ing.
The vehicle remains steerable even during full
brake applications, thus increasing active
safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost. It thus helps to achieve the shortest
possible braking distance during full braking.
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided
by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the full braking.
Adaptive brake assistant
In combination with the Active Cruise Control,
this system ensures that the brakes respond
even more rapidly when braking in critical situa‐
tions. Refer also to Collision warning, refer to
page 111.
Drive-off assistant
This system supports driving away on gradients.
The parking brake is not required.
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive away with‐
out delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may
roll back slightly.
Driving off without delay
After releasing the foot brake, start driving
without delay, since the drive-off assistant will
not hold the vehicle in place for more than ap‐
prox. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin rolling
back.◀
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
The concept
DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels
when driving away and accelerating.
DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐
tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Subject
to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicle
on a steady course by reducing engine speed
and by applying brakes at individual wheels.
Adjust your driving style to the situation
An appropriate driving style is always the
responsibility of the driver.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even
with DSC.
Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety
margin by driving in a risky manner.◀
Seite 99
Driving stability control systems Controls
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Indicator/warning lamps
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
trols the drive forces and brake forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has
failed.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐
duced during acceleration and when driving in
bends.
Stabilizing interventions by the Integral Active
Steering system are only performed by the rear
axle steering.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
Press and hold the button, but not lon‐
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐
strument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed.
The DSC system is switched off.
Activating DSC
Press the button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
lamp go out.
Indicator/warning lamps
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is de‐
activated.
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control
The concept
The DTC system is a version of the DSC in which
forward momentum is optimized.
The system ensures maximum forward momen‐
tum on special road conditions, e.g., unplowed
snowy roads, but driving stability is limited.
It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri‐
ate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC un‐
der the following special circumstances:
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
▷ When rocking the vehicle or driving off in
deep snow or on loose surfaces.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
Traction Control
Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC
provides maximum traction on loose ground.
Driving stability is limited during acceleration
and when driving in bends.
Activating DTC
Press the button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC
OFF lights up.
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator
lamp go out.
Indicator/warning lamps
When DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed
in the tachometer.
Seite 100
Controls Driving stability control systems
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
The indicator lamp lights up: DTC Dy‐
namic Traction Control is activated.
Adaptive Drive
The concept
Adaptive Drive includes the following systems:
▷ Dynamic Drive, refer to page 101
▷ Dynamic Damping Control, refer to
page 101
The system increases driving stability and driv‐
ing comfort.
Dynamic Drive
The concept
Dynamic Drive reduces the lateral inclination of
the vehicle that occurs during rapid driving in
curves or during quick evasive maneuvers.
Driving stability and driving comfort are in‐
creased under all driving conditions. The system
utilizes active stabilizer bars on the front and rear
axles that react immediately to all driving situa‐
tions.
Programs
The system offers two different programs.
The programs can be selected via the Driving
Experience Switch, refer to page 102.
SPORT
Sporty tuning for greater driving agility.
COMFORT
Comfort-oriented tuning for optimal comfort.
Dynamic Damping Control
The concept
This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐
tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐
eling on uneven road surfaces.
The system enhances driving dynamics and
comfort as required for the road surface and
driving style.
Programs
The system offers three different programs.
The programs can be selected via the Driving
Experience Switch, refer to page 102.
SPORT
Consistently sporty control of the shock absorb‐
ers for greater driving agility.
COMFORT
Balanced tuning between the COMFORT+ and
SPORT programs.
COMFORT+
Comfort-oriented tuning of the shock absorbers
for optimal traveling comfort.
Integral Active Steering
The concept
Integral Active Steering is a combination of Ac‐
tive Steering and rear axle steering.
Active Steering varies the steering angle of the
wheels in relation to the steering wheel move‐
ment as a function of the speed.
At speeds up to approx. 37 mph/60 km/h, e.g.,
in curves, the steering angle is increased, i.e.,
steering becomes more direct.
The rear axle steering acts to increase maneu‐
verability by turning the rear wheels slightly in a
direction opposite to the front wheels.
Seite 101
Driving stability control systems Controls
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
At higher speeds, the steering angle is increas‐
ingly reduced.
The rear wheels are turned to the same angle as
the front wheels.
In critical situations, Integral Active Steering can
specifically steer the front and rear wheels to
stabilize the vehicle before the driver intervenes,
e.g., when braking where road conditions differ
on the left and right sides of the vehicle.
Initializing
In rare cases, it may become necessary to initi‐
alize the Integral Active Steering.
The warning lamp lights up. A Check
Control message is displayed.
1.
With the engine running, turn the steering
wheel all the way to the left and right several
times in a uniform manner until the warning
lamp disappears.
2. Have the system checked if the warning
lamp does not go out after moving the steer‐
ing wheel approx. 6 times or if the steering
wheel is at an angle.
Using snow chains
Ensure that the rear axle steering is deactivated
when using snow chains, refer to page 256.
Programs
The system offers two different programs.
The programs can be selected via the Driving
Experience Switch, refer to page 102.
SPORT
Consistently sporty tuning of the Integral Active
Steering for greater driving agility.
COMFORT
Balanced tuning of the Integral Active Steering
for optimal traveling comfort.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, the steering wheel
must be turned further, while the vehicle re‐
sponds more sensitively to steering wheel
movements in the higher speed range.
The stability-enhancing intervention may be de‐
activated.
Proceed cautiously and drive defensively.
Have the system checked.
Driving Experience Switch
The concept
The Driving Experience Switch can be used to
adjust the driving dynamics of the vehicle. For
this purpose various programs are available for
selection that are activated via the two buttons
of the Driving Experience Switch and the DSC
OFF-button.
Operating the programs
Press the button Program
DSC OFF
TRACTION
SPORT+
SPORT
COMFORT
COMFORT+
ECO PRO
For Dynamic Damper Control, the lower button
is labeled with COMFORT.
Automatic program change
The system automatically switches to COM‐
FORT in the following situations:
▷ Failure of Integral Active Steering.
▷ Failure of Dynamic Damping Control.
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
Seite 102
Controls Driving stability control systems
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
DSC OFF
Driving stability is limited during acceleration
and when driving in bends.
Stabilizing interventions by the Integral Active
Steering system are only performed by the rear
axle steering.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Activating DSC OFF
Press and hold the button, but not lon‐
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator lamp for the DSC lights up in the in‐
strument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed in
the tachometer.
The DSC system is switched off.
Deactivating DSC OFF
Press the button.
DSC OFF and the DSC indicator lamp
go out.
Indicator/warning lamps
When DSC OFF is activated, DSC OFF is dis‐
played in the tachometer.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC OFF
is activated.
TRACTION
Maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC
Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. Driv‐
ing stability is limited during acceleration and
when driving in bends.
Activating TRACTION
Press the button.
TRACTION is displayed in the tachom‐
eter.
The DSC indicator lamp in the instrument clus‐
ter lights up.
Deactivating TRACTION
Press the button again.
TRACTION and the DSC indicator lamp
go out.
Indicator/warning lamps
When TRACTION is activated, TRACTION is
displayed in the tachometer.
The indicator lamp lights up: TRACTION
is activated.
SPORT+
Sporty driving with optimized chassis and sus‐
pension with limited driving stabilization.
Dynamic Traction Control is switched on.
The driver handles several of the stabilization
tasks.
Activating SPORT+
Press the button repeatedly until
SPORT+ appears in the tachometer
and the DSC indicator lamp lights up in the in‐
strument cluster.
Indicator/warning lamps
SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.
The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up.
SPORT
Consistently sporty tuning of the suspension for
greater driving agility with maximum driving sta‐
bilization.
The program can be configured to individual
specifications.
The configuration is stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
Seite 103
Driving stability control systems Controls
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Activating SPORT
Press the button repeatedly until
SPORT appears in the tachometer.
Configuring SPORT
If the display on the Control Display, refer to
page 104,is activated, the sport program can be
set to individual specifications.
After the sport program is activated, select
"Configure SPORT" on the displayed panel and
configure the program.
Optionally, the sport program can be configured
before it is activated:
1.
"Settings"
2. "SPORT mode" or: "Driving mode"
3. Configure the program.
This configuration is retrieved when the sport
program is activated.
COMFORT
For a balanced tuning with maximum driving sta‐
bilization.
Activating COMFORT
Press the button repeatedly until the
program display in the tachometer
goes out.
In certain situations, the system automatically
changes to the NORMAL program, automatic
program change, refer to page 102.
ECO PRO
ECO PRO, refer to page 156, provides consis‐
tent tuning to minimize fuel consumption for
maximum range with maximum driving stabili‐
zation.
Comfort functions and the engine controller are
adjusted.
The program can be configured to individual
specifications.
Activating ECO PRO
Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO
is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Configuring ECO PRO
1. Activate ECO PRO.
2. "Configure ECO PRO"
Make the desired settings.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Selected program
The selected program is dis‐
played in the tachometer.
Program selection
Pressing the button displays a list
of the selectable programs.
Display on the Control Display
Program changes can be displayed briefly on
the Control Display.
To do so, make the following settings:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Driving mode"
3. "Driving mode info"
Seite 104
Controls Driving stability control systems
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Driving comfort
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Active Cruise Control with
Stop & Go function, ACC
The concept
This system can be used to select a desired
speed that the vehicle will maintain automati‐
cally on clear roads.
To the extent possible, the system automatically
adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle ahead of
you.
The distance that the vehicle maintains to the
vehicle ahead of you can be varied.
For safety reasons, it depends on the speed.
To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐
tomatically decelerates, applies the brakes
lightly, or accelerates again if the vehicle ahead
begins moving faster.
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, the
system is able to detect this within the given
system limits. If the vehicle ahead of your drives
away again from a halt, your vehicle is able to
accelerate if operated accordingly.
Even if some time passes before the vehicle
drives away again, the BMW can still be accel‐
erated automatically and simply.
As soon as the road is clear, it accelerates to the
desired speed.
The speed is also maintained on downhill gra‐
dients, but may not be maintained on uphill
slopes if engine power is insufficient.
Buttons at a glance
1 System on/off, interrupt
2 Resume speed
3 Store speed
4 Reduce distance
5 Store, maintain/change speed
6 Increase distance
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Switching on
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
light up and the mark in the speedometer is set
to the current speed.
Cruise control can be used.
Switching off
Deactivated or interrupted system
If the system is deactivated or interrupted,
actively intervene by braking and, if necessary,
with evasive maneuvers; otherwise, there is the
danger of an accident occurring.◀
If switching off the system while stationary,
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
Press the button.
Seite 105
Driving comfort Controls
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
▷ If active: press twice.
▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
and distance are deleted.
Interrupting the system
When active, press the button.
If interrupting the system while stationary, press
on the brake pedal at the same time.
The system is automatically interrupted if:
▷ The brakes are applied.
▷ Transmission position D is disengaged.
▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated
or DSC is deactivated.
▷ DSC is actively controlling stability.
▷ The safety belt and the driver's door are
opened when the vehicle is standing.
▷ The system has not detected objects for an
extended period, e.g., on a road with very lit‐
tle traffic without road edge line markings.
▷ Radar sensor is soiled.
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press the button.
or:
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly
displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in
the instrument cluster, refer to page 107.
When cruise control is maintained or stored,
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
Changing, maintaining, and storing the
speed
The rocker switch can be pressed while the sys‐
tem is interrupted to maintain and store the cur‐
rent speed. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
switched on, if necessary.
Adapting the desired speed
Adapt the desired speed to the road con‐
ditions and be ready to brake at all times; other‐
wise, there is the danger of an accident occur‐
ring.◀
Speed differences
Large differences in speed relative to ve‐
hicles ahead of the vehicle cannot be compen‐
sated by the system, for example when:
▷ Catching up rapidly with a truck.
▷ Another vehicle suddenly swerves into the
wrong lane.◀
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is
clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the
point of resistance, the desired speed in‐
Seite 106
Controls Driving comfort
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
creases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by a maximum of
5 mph/10 km/h. Max. adjustable speed:
110 mph/180 km/h.
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
action.
Distance
Selecting a distance
Adjust the distance according to the traffic
and weather conditions; otherwise, there is the
danger of an accident occurring. Maintain the
prescribed safety distance.◀
Reduce distance
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
The selected distance, refer to page 108, is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Increase distance
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
The selected distance, refer to page 108, is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Calling up the desired speed and
distance
While driving
Press the button with the system
switched on.
In the following cases, the stored speed value is
deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
While standing
Before leaving the vehicle, secure it
against rolling.
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning, engage position P of the automatic trans‐
mission and apply the parking brake. Otherwise,
the vehicle may begin to roll.◀
The system brought the vehicle to a complete
standstill.
▷ Green mark in the speedometer during a
brief idle phase:
The vehicle ahead of you drives away while
the mark is green: your vehicle accelerates
without anything having to be done.
▷ Switch to orange of the mark in the speed‐
ometer after approx. 2 sec.:
The vehicle ahead of you drives away, while
the mark is orange: in order to accelerate,
briefly press the gas pedal or press the RES
button or SET button.
Rolling bars in the distance indicator mean that
the vehicle ahead of you has driven off.
You actively braked your vehicle to a halt by
pressing on the brake pedal and it is standing
behind another vehicle:
1.
Press the button to call up a stored
desired speed.
2. Release the brake pedal.
3. Press on the accelerator briefly, or press the
RES button or the rocker switch when the
vehicle ahead of you drives away.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Desired speed
▷ The marking lights up in
green: the system is active.
▷ The marking lights up in or‐
ange: the system has been
interrupted.
Seite 107
Driving comfort Controls
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
▷ The marking does not light up: the system is
switched off.
Brief status display
Selected desired speed.
If --- appears briefly on the display for Check
Control messages, it is possible that the system
requirements for operation are currently not
met.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
The selected distance to the vehicle driving
ahead of you is shown.
Distance display
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
Distance 4
This value is set after the system is
switched on.
The system has been interrupted or
distance control is deactivated be‐
cause the accelerator is being
pressed; a vehicle was not detected.
Distance control is deactivated be‐
cause the accelerator is being
pressed; a vehicle was detected.
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven
away.
Indicator/warning lamps
Personal responsibility
The indicator and warning lamps do not
relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt
his or her desired driving speed and style to the
traffic conditions.◀
Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐
ped, the indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster indicates whether the system is
switched on.
The vehicle symbol lights up orange:
A vehicle has been detected ahead of
you.
The vehicle symbol flashes orange:
The conditions are not adequate for op‐
erating the system.
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively assume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator.
The vehicle symbol flashes red and an
acoustic signal sounds:
You are requested to intervene by brak‐
ing or making an evasive maneuver.
System limits
Speed range
Best results are achieved when using the sys‐
tem on well-developed roads and highways.
The desired speed can be selected between
20 mph/30 km/h to 110 mph/180 km/h.
The system can also be activated when station‐
ary.
Comply with the legal speed limit in every situa‐
tion when using the system.
Seite 108
Controls Driving comfort
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Detection range
The detection capacity of the system and the
automatic braking capacity are limited.
Two-wheeled vehicles driving ahead of you
for instance might not be detected.
Limited detection capacity
Because of the limits to the detection ca‐
pacity, you should be alert at all times so that you
can intervene actively, if necessary; otherwise,
there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
Deceleration
The system does not decelerate when a sta‐
tionary obstacle is located in the same lane, e.g.,
a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the end of traffic
congestion.
The system also does not respond to:
▷ Pedestrians or similarly slow road users.
▷ Red traffic lights.
▷ Stationary objects.
▷ Cross traffic.
▷ Approaching traffic.
No warnings
A warning may not be issued when ap‐
proaching a stationary or very slow-moving ob‐
stacle. You must react yourself; otherwise, there
is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
Swerving vehicles
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected
until it is completely within the same lane as your
vehicle.
Swerving vehicles
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐
ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g.,
when rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the
system requests that the driver intervene by
braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if
necessary. You must react yourself; otherwise,
there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
Unexpected lane change
If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly moves
into another lane from behind a stopped vehicle,
you yourself must react, as the system does not
react to stopped vehicles.
Seite 109
Driving comfort Controls
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Cornering
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
speed is reduced slightly in the curve, although
curves cannot be anticipated in advance. There‐
fore, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed.
In tight curves, situations may result due to the
restricted detection range of the system in
which a vehicle driving ahead of you may not be
detected at all, or not until after a considerable
delay.
When approaching a curve, the system may re‐
act briefly to the vehicles in the next lane due to
the bend of the curve. Any deceleration of the
vehicle by the system can be compensated for
by briefly accelerating. After the accelerator
pedal is released, the system becomes active
again and independently controls the speed.
Driving away
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive
away automatically, e.g., on steep inclines or be‐
hind bumps in the road.
Radar sensor
Position
Radar sensor
Dirty or covered sensor
A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the detec‐
tion of vehicles.
▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐
move layers of snow and ice carefully.
▷ Do not cover the view field of the radar sen‐
sor.
Malfunction
The system cannot be activated if the sensor is
not aligned correctly. This may be caused by
damage incurred during parking, for example.
A Check Control message is displayed if the
system fails.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is governed
by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ OAYARS3-A
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐
ence, and
Seite 110
Controls Driving comfort
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
▷ this device must accept any interference re‐
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Collision warning with
braking function
The concept
If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise
Control with Stop & Go, the collision warning is
controlled via the cruise control radar sensor.
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
danger of collision at speeds above approx.
10 mph/15 km/h. The time of these warnings
may vary depending on the current driving sit‐
uation.
The collision warning is available even if cruise
control has been deactivated.
It responds to stationary or moving objects that
are within the detection range of the radar sys‐
tem.
When the vehicle is intentionally brought into
contact with a vehicle, the collision warning is
delayed to avoid false warnings.
Warning stages
Prewarning
This warning is issued, for example, when there
is the impending danger of a collision or the dis‐
tance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
Acute warning with braking function
Warning of the imminent danger of a collision
when the vehicle approaches another object at
a relatively high differential speed.
The acute warning prompts the driver to inter‐
vene and, if there is the danger of a collision, is
accompanied by a braking intervention.
The braking intervention is executed with lim‐
ited braking force and for a brief period only. The
intervention cannot bring the vehicle to a com‐
plete standstill.
The braking intervention is executed only if DSC
Dynamic Stability Control is switched on.
Adapting your speed and driving style
The acute warning does not relieve the
driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her
driving speed and style to the traffic condi‐
tions.◀
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
pressing on the accelerator or by actively mov‐
ing the steering wheel.
When towing or tow-starting the vehicle, switch
off the collision warning with braking function to
prevent undesired interventions.
The braking function is deactivated if the DSC
Dynamic Stability Control or DTC Dynamic
Traction Control is deactivated.
Seite 111
Driving comfort Controls
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Switching the warning function on/off
Press the button
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The state is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Configuring the warning time
After the warning function is switched on, the
warning time can be set via the iDrive.
These settings have no effect on the time of the
warning from the Active Cruise Control that
prompts the driver to intervene or brake.
The selected channel is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Display in the instrument cluster
The collision warning can be issued in the in‐
strument cluster, in the Head-up Display, and
acoustically.
Warning stages
Symbol Measure
The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐
ing.
Increase distance.
The vehicle flashes red and an
acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐
ing.
You are requested to intervene by
braking or making an evasive maneu‐
ver.
Adapting your speed and driving style
The display does not relieve the driver of
the responsibility to adapt his or her driving
speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀
System limits
Be alert
Due to system limitations, warnings may
be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or
improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready
to intervene; otherwise, there is the danger of an
accident occurring.◀
Detection range
The detection capacity of the radar sensor and
the collision warning has limitations.
This may result in the warning not being issued
or being issued late.
For example, the following situations may not be
detected:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you
or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
▷ Pedestrians.
Seite 112
Controls Driving comfort
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the radar sensor is dirty or covered.
Prewarning sensitivity
Depending on the set prewarning time, this may
result in increased false warnings.
Cruise control
The concept
The system is functional at speeds beginning at
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
It maintains the speed that was set using the
control elements on the steering wheel.
The system brakes on downhill gradients if en‐
gine braking action is insufficient.
Unfavorable conditions
Do not use the system if unfavorable con‐
ditions make it impossible to drive at a constant
speed, for instance:
▷ On curvy roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or on
a loose road surface.
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle
and cause an accident.◀
Controls
At a glance
1 System on/off, interrupt
2 Resume speed
3 Store speed
4 Store, maintain/change speed
Switching on
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the
current speed.
Cruise control can be used.
Switching off
Deactivated or interrupted system
If the system is deactivated or interrupted,
actively intervene by braking and, if necessary,
with evasive maneuvers; otherwise, there is the
danger of an accident occurring.◀
Press the button.
▷ If active: press twice.
▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Interrupting the system
When active, press the button.
Seite 113
Driving comfort Controls
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
The system is automatically interrupted if:
▷ The brakes are applied.
▷ The transmission position D is disengaged.
▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated
or DSC is deactivated.
▷ DSC is actively controlling stability.
Maintaining/storing the current speed
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly
displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in
the speedometer, refer to page 114.
When cruise control is maintained or stored,
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
Changing/maintaining speed
The rocker switch can be pressed while the sys‐
tem is interrupted in order to maintain and store
the current speed.
Adapting the desired speed
Adapt the desired speed to the road con‐
ditions and be ready to brake at all times; other‐
wise, there is the danger of an accident occur‐
ring.◀
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is
clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the
point of resistance, the desired speed in‐
creases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by a maximum of
5 mph/10 km/h.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance
point and holding it there accelerates or de‐
celerates the vehicle without requiring pres‐
sure on the accelerator. After the rocker
switch is released, the vehicle maintains its
final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the
resistance point causes the vehicle to ac‐
celerate more rapidly.
Resuming the desired speed
Press the button.
The stored speed is reached and maintained.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Indicator lamp
Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐
ped, the indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster indicates whether the system is
switched on.
Seite 114
Controls Driving comfort
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Desired speed
▷ The marking lights up in
green: the system is active.
▷ The marking lights up in or‐
ange: the system has been
interrupted.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system is
switched off.
Brief status display
Selected desired speed.
If --- appears briefly on the display for Check
Control messages, it is possible that the system
requirements for operation are currently not
met.
PDC Park Distance Control
The concept
In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control, the
backup camera, refer to page 117, can be
switched on.
PDC supports you when parking. Objects that
you are approaching slowly in front of or behind
your vehicle are indicated by:
▷ Signal tones.
▷ Visual display.
Measurement
Measurements are made by ultrasound sensors
in the bumpers.
The range is approx. 6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given:
▷ By the front sensors and the two rear corner
sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.
5 ft/1.50 m.
System limits
Check the traffic situation as well
PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa‐
tion. Check the traffic situation around the vehi‐
cle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident
could result from road users or objects located
outside of the PDC detection range.
Loud noises from outside and inside the vehicle
may prevent you from hearing the PDC's signal
tone.◀
Avoid driving quickly with PDC
Avoid approaching an object quickly.
Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet
active.
For technical reasons, the system may other‐
wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The detection of objects can reach the physical
limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g.:
▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With low objects.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before or
after a continuous tone sounds.
High, protruding objects such as ledges may not
be detected.
False warnings
PDC may issue a warning under the following
conditions even though there is no obstacle
within the detection range:
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered in
ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
Seite 115
Driving comfort Controls
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, e.g., in underground garages.
▷ In heavy exhaust.
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
sweeping machines, high pressure steam
cleaners or neon lights.
Switching on automatically
Select transmission position R with the engine
running.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Signal tones
When approaching an object, an intermittent
tone is sounded that indicates the position of the
object. For example, if an object is detected to
the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds
from the left rear speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object becomes,
the shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 12 in/30 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
If objects are located both in front of and behind
the vehicle, an alternating continuous signal is
sounded.
The intermittent tone is interrupted after approx.
3 seconds:
▷ If the vehicle stops in front of an object that
is detected by only one of the corner sen‐
sors.
▷ If moving parallel to a wall.
The signal tone is switched off:
▷ When the vehicle moves away from an ob‐
ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm.
▷ When transmission position P is engaged.
Volume
You can set the volume of the PDC signal tone,
refer to page 181.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can be
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
farther away are displayed on the Control Dis‐
play before a signal tone sounds.
A display appears as soon as Park Distance
Control (PDC) is activated.
If the backup camera image was selected last, it
again appears on the display. To switch to PDC:
1.
"Rear view camera" Select the symbol
on the Control Display.
2. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Zoom view
On the left part of the display screen, the vehicle
is shown enlarged.
Seite 116
Controls Driving comfort
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
▷ Forward gear engaged: front area of the ve‐
hicle.
▷ Reverse gear engaged: rear area of the ve‐
hicle.
Display on the Control Display
Switching on the backup camera via the
iDrive
With PDC activated:
"Rear view camera"
The backup camera image is displayed. The set‐
ting is stored for the remote control currently in
use.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
On the Control Display, the areas in front of and
behind the vehicle are shaded. PDC has failed.
Have the system checked.
To ensure full operability:
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and main‐
tain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Surround View
The concept
Surround View includes the following systems:
▷ Backup camera, refer to page 117.
▷ Side View, refer to page 121.
▷ Top View, refer to page 120.
It assists the driver when parking, maneuvering
and on blind driveways and intersections.
Backup camera
The concept
The backup camera provides assistance in park‐
ing and maneuvering backwards. The area be‐
hind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display.
System limits
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident
could result from road users or objects located
outside the picture area of the backup camera.◀
Detection of objects
High, protruding objects such as ledges
may not be detected by the backup camera.◀
Switching on automatically
Select transmission position R with the engine
running.
The backup camera image is displayed if the
system was switched on via the iDrive.
Seite 117
Driving comfort Controls
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The PDC is shown on the Control Display.
Switch on the backup camera via the iDrive, refer
to page 119.
Assistance functions
Functional requirement
▷ The backup camera is switched on.
▷ The trunk lid is fully closed.
Pathway lines
▷ Can be shown in the backup camera image
when in transmission position R.
▷ Help you to estimate the space required
when parking and maneuvering on level
roads.
▷ Are dependent on the current steering angle
and are continuously adjusted to the steer‐
ing wheel movements.
Show the parking aid lines, refer to page 119.
Turning circle lines
▷ Can be shown in the backup camera image.
▷ Show the course of the smallest possible
turning circle on a level road.
▷ Only one turning circle line is displayed
when the steering wheel is turned.
Show the parking aid lines, refer to page 119.
Parking using pathway and turning
circle lines
1.
Position the vehicle so that the turning circle
lines lead to within the limits of the parking
space.
Seite 118
Controls Driving comfort
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning circle line.
Obstacle marking
▷ Spatially-shaped markings can be shown in
the backup camera image.
Their colored steps match the markings of the
PDC. This simplifies estimation of the distance
to the object shown.
Activating the assistance functions
More than one assistance function can be active
at the same time.
Showing the parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Pathway and turning circle lines are displayed.
Showing the obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"
Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.
Display on the Control Display
Switching on the backup camera via
iDrive
With PDC activated:
"Rear view camera"
The backup camera image is displayed. The set‐
ting is stored for the remote control currently in
use.
Brightness
With the backup camera switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Contrast
With the backup camera switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Camera
The camera lens is located under the BMW em‐
blem of the trunk lid. The image quality may be
impaired by dirt.
Clean the lens, refer to page 278.
Seite 119
Driving comfort Controls
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Top View
The concept
Top View assists you in parking and maneuver‐
ing. The area around the doors and the road area
around the vehicle are shown on the Control
Display for this purpose.
Capturing the image
The image is captured by two cameras
integrated in the exterior mirrors and by the
backup camera.
The range is at least 7 ft/2 m to the side and rear.
In this way, obstacles up to the height of the ex‐
terior mirrors are detected early.
System limits
Top View cannot be used in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ With a door open.
▷ With the trunk lid open.
▷ With an exterior mirror folded in.
▷ In poor light.
A Check Control message is displayed in some
of these situations.
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident
could result from road users or objects located
outside the picture area of the cameras.◀
Switching on automatically
Select transmission position R with the engine
running.
The Top View and PDC images are displayed if
the system is switched on via iDrive.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
If Top View is displayed, switch on the backup
camera via the iDrive, refer to page 121.
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can be
shown on the Control Display.
When the distance to an object is small, a red bar
is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in the PDC
display.
The display appears as soon as Top View is ac‐
tivated.
If the backup camera image was selected last, it
again appears on the display. To switch to Top
View:
"Rear view camera" Select the symbol on
the Control Display.
Seite 120
Controls Driving comfort
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Display on the Control Display
Switching on the backup camera via
iDrive
With Top View switched on:
"Rear view camera"
The backup camera image is displayed. The set‐
ting is stored for the remote control currently in
use.
Brightness
With Top View switched on:
1.
"Brightness"
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Contrast
With Top View switched on:
1.
"Contrast"
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Displaying the turning circle and
pathway lines
▷ The static, red turning circle line shows the
space needed to the side of the vehicle
when the steering wheel is turned all the
way.
▷ The variable, green pathway line assists you
in assessing the amount of space actually
needed to the side of the vehicle.
The pathway line is dependent on the cur‐
rent steering angle and is continuously ad‐
justed with the steering wheel movement.
"Parking aid lines"
Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.
Cameras
The lenses of the Top View cameras are located
at the bottom of the exterior mirror housings.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
Clean the lens, refer to page 278.
Side View
The concept
Side View provides an early look at cross traffic
at blind driveways and intersections. Road users
concealed by obstacles to the left and right of
the vehicle can only be detected relatively late
from the driver's seat. To improve visibility, two
cameras in the front of the vehicle record the
traffic situation on each side.
Capturing the image
Two cameras integrated in the bumpers capture
the image.
The cameras capture a maximum range of
330 ft/100 m.
Display
The images from both cameras are shown si‐
multaneously on the Control Display.
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle on blind driveways and intersections with
your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could re‐
sult from road users or objects located outside
the picture area of the Side View cameras.◀
Seite 121
Driving comfort Controls
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Switching on/off
Press the button.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if necessary.
Display on the Control Display
The traffic area to the left and right is displayed
on the Control Display.
Guidelines at the bottom of the image show the
position of the front of the vehicle.
Brightness
With the Side View switched on:
1.
"Brightness"
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Contrast
With the Side View switched on:
1. "Contrast"
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Cameras
The two camera lenses are located on the sides
of the bumper.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
Clean the lens, refer to page 278.
Parking assistant
The concept
This system assists the driver in parking parallel
to the road.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on
both sides of the vehicle.
The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐
sible parking line and takes control of steering
during the parking procedure.
Seite 122
Controls Driving comfort
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
When parking, also take note of the visual and
acoustic information issued by the PDC and the
parking assistant and accelerate or brake ac‐
cordingly.
A component of the parking assistant is the PDC
Park Distance Control, refer to page 115.
Personal responsibility
The parking assistant does not relieve the
driver of responsibility for the vehicle during the
parking procedure.
Watch the parking space and parking procedure
closely and intervene if necessary; otherwise,
there is the danger of an accident.◀
Requirements
For measuring parking spaces
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Suitable parking space
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
▷ Minimum length: own vehicle length plus
approx. 4 ft/1.2 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
For parking procedure
Closed doors.
Switching on
Using the button
Press the button.
The LED lights up.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated automatically.
By engaging reverse
Shift into reverse.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
Activate: "Parking Assistant" Select the
symbol in the Control Display.
Display on the Control Display
Activating/deactivating the system
Symbol Meaning
Gray: the system is not available.
White: the system is available but not
activated.
The system is activated.
Seite 123
Driving comfort Controls
123
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
System status
Gray: the system is not activated.
Parking space search.
Blue: the system is activated. A
suitable parking space was
found.
The parking procedure is active.
Steering control has been seized.
Status of the parking space search
▷ Gray, arrow 1: parking space search.
▷ Blue, arrow 2: parking space is suitable.
The vehicle is parked in the parking space if
the parking procedure is active.
▷ No display: no parking space search.
Parking using the parking assistant
Personal responsibility
The parking assistant does not relieve the
driver of responsibility for the vehicle during the
parking procedure.
Watch the parking space and parking procedure
closely and intervene if necessary; otherwise,
there is the danger of an accident.◀
Check the traffic situation as well
Loud sounds outside and within the vehi‐
cle can drown out the signal tones of the parking
assistant and PDC.
Check the traffic situation around the vehicle
with your own eyes; otherwise, there is the dan‐
ger of an accident.◀
1. Switch on the parking assistant and activate
it if necessary.
The status of the parking space search is in‐
dicated on the Control Display.
2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
The end of the parking procedure is indi‐
cated on the Control Display.
3. Adjust the parking position yourself if nec‐
essary.
Notes
▷ The parking assistant takes control of steer‐
ing for as long as the symbol for active park‐
ing appears on the display.
▷ The system maneuvers the vehicle to posi‐
tion it properly in smaller parking spaces, for
example.
▷ To achieve the best possible parking posi‐
tion, wait for the automatic steering wheel
movement after the gear change when the
vehicle is stationary.
▷ When parking in parking spaces on the driv‐
er's side, the corresponding turn signal must
be set.
Interrupting manually
The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
time by:
▷ Grasping the steering wheel and steering
yourself.
Seite 124
Controls Driving comfort
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol on
the Control Display.
Interrupting automatically
The procedure is interrupted automatically:
▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
6 mph/10 km/h.
▷ On snow-covered or slippery road surfaces
if necessary.
▷ If doors are open.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Continuing
An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐
tinued if necessary.
Follow the instructions on the Control Display to
do this.
Switching off
The system can be deactivated as follows:
▷ Press the button.
▷ Switch off the ignition.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
checked.
System limits
Changes to the parking space
Changes to the parking space after it was
measured are not taken into account by the sys‐
tem.
Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐
vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci‐
dent occurring.◀
Transporting loads
Loads that extend beyond the perimeter
of the vehicle are not taken into account by the
system during the parking procedure.
Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐
vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci‐
dent occurring.◀
Curbs
The parking assistant may steer the vehi‐
cle over or onto curbs.
Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐
vene; otherwise, the wheels, tires, or the vehicle
may become damaged.◀
No parking assistance
The parking assistant does not provide assis‐
tance in parking.
▷ In tight curves.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ When sensors are dirty or iced over.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
▷ When leaves or snow has collected in the
parking space.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The detection of objects can reach the physical
limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g.:
▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure,
such as fences.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before or
after a continuous tone sounds.
High, protruding objects such as ledges may not
be detected.
Seite 125
Driving comfort Controls
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
The parking assistant may identify parking
spaces that are not suitable for parking.
Ultrasound sensors
The ultrasounds sensors used to measure park‐
ing spaces are located in the side turn signals.
To ensure full operability:
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and main‐
tain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Night Vision with pedestrian
detection
The concept
Night Vision with pedestrian detection is a night
vision system.
An infrared camera records the area in front of
the vehicle and displays the image on the Con‐
trol Display.
The picture is a heat image. The system has an
integrated pedestrian detection function that
detects pedestrians and cyclists. Warm objects
that are similar in shape to human beings are
detected by the system.
Personal responsibility
Night Vision cannot replace the driver's
personal judgment of the visibility conditions
and the traffic situation. The view ahead and the
actual visibility conditions must always be the
basis on which the vehicle speed is adjusted;
otherwise, there is a risk to road safety.◀
Heat image
The image shows the heat radiated by objects
in the field of view of the camera.
Warm objects have a light appearance and cold
objects, a dark appearance.
The ability to detect an object depends on the
temperature difference between the object and
the background and on the level of heat radiation
emitted by the object. Objects that are similar in
temperature to the environment or that radiate
very little heat are difficult to detect.
For safety reasons, when driving at speeds
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambient
light, the image is only displayed when the low
beams are switched on.
A still image is displayed at regular intervals for
a fraction of a second.
Pedestrian detection
The pedestrian detection and warning system
only operates in darkness and only when a heat
image is displayed.
Seite 126
Controls Driving comfort
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Warm objects that are similar in shape to human
beings are detected by the system.
People detected by the system are displayed
with a slight yellow hue.
Under good ambient conditions, the pedestrian
detection system operates within a range of ap‐
prox. 50 ft/15 m to approx. 330 ft/100 m.
Environmental influences can limit the availabil‐
ity of pedestrian detection.
If pedestrian detection is not available, a symbol
is displayed in the heat image.
This symbol disappears when the function be‐
comes available again.
Warning of people in danger
If the system detects a person in a defined area
in front of the vehicle and if there is the danger
of collision with this person, a warning symbol
appears on the Control Display and in the Head-
up Display.
Although both the shape and the heat radiation
are analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruled out.
Warning area in front of the vehicle
The warning area in front of the vehicle is divided
into two areas.
▷ Central area 1 directly in front of the vehicle.
▷ Expanded area 2 to the right and left.
The entire area moves along with the vehicle in
the direction of the steering angle and changes
with the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed in‐
creases, the area becomes longer and wider, for
example.
Prewarning
The yellow symbol is displayed when a
person is detected in the central area,
arrow 1, immediately in front of the ve‐
hicle.
The yellow symbol is displayed when a
person detected in the extended area,
arrow 2, is moving from the right or left
to the central area.
Acute warning
The red symbol is displayed and a signal
sounds. You are requested to intervene
immediately by braking or making an
evasive maneuver.
Display in the Head-up Display
The warning is displayed simultane‐
ously in the Head-Up Display and on the
Control Display. The displayed symbol
can vary with the people detected. For people
Seite 127
Driving comfort Controls
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
located in the central area, the distance to the
person is indicated by the size of the symbol.
System limits
Basic limits
System operation is limited in situations such as
the following:
▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in
tight curves.
▷ When the camera is dirty or the protective
glass is damaged.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ At very high external temperatures.
Limits of pedestrian detection
Animals are not detected by the pedestrian de‐
tection function, even if they are clearly visible in
the image.
Limited pedestrian detection:
▷ When people are fully or partially covered,
especially when their heads are covered.
▷ When people are not in an upright position,
e.g., when lying down.
▷ Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g.,
recumbent bicycles).
▷ After physical damage to the system, e.g.,
after an accident.
Activation/deactivation
Press the button.
Display
Adjustments via the iDrive
With Night Vision switched on:
1. Activate Night Vision with pedestrian detec‐
tion.
2. Press the controller.
3. Open the desired menu item.
▷ "Brightness"
▷ "Contrast"
▷ "Pedestrian detection"
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Camera
Rain, dirt, snow, or ice can impair camera oper‐
ation.
The camera is automatically heated when the
external temperatures are low.
The camera is automatically cleaned together
with the headlamps.
Clean the lens, refer to page 278.
Seite 128
Controls Driving comfort
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Head-up Display
The concept
This system projects important information into
the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed.
In this way, the driver can get information with‐
out averting his or her eyes from the road.
Display visibility
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐
play is influenced by:
▷ Certain sitting positions.
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐
play.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷ Wet roads.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, check the basic set‐
tings.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
Display
1 Lane departure warning
2 Active Cruise Control
3 Desired speed
4 Navigation system
5 Speed
The collision warning, Night Vision pedestrian
warning, or Check Control messages are dis‐
played briefly if needed.
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-up display"
3. "Displayed information"
4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up
Display.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Setting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient light.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-up display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller.
The brightness is adjusted.
When the low beams are switched on, the
brightness of the Head-up Display can be addi‐
Seite 129
Driving comfort Controls
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
tionally influenced using the instrument lighting,
refer to page 85.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Adjusting the height
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-up display"
3. "Height"
4. Turn the controller.
The height is adjusted.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
The shape of the windshield makes it possible
to display a precise image.
A film in the windshield prevents double images
from being displayed.
Therefore, have the special windshield replaced
by a service center only.
Seite 130
Controls Driving comfort
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Climate control
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Automatic climate control
1 Air distribution, left
2 Temperature, left
3 AUTO program, left
4 Air volume, AUTO intensity, residual heat,
left
5 Remove ice and condensation
6 Maximum cooling
7 Display
8 Air volume, AUTO intensity, right
9 AUTO program, right
10 Temperature, right
11 Air distribution, right
12 Seat heating, right 48
13 Active seat ventilation, right 49
14 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐
lated-air mode
15 Cooling function
16 Rear window defroster
17 ALL program
18 Active seat ventilation, left 49
19 Seat heating, left 48
Seite 131
Climate control Controls
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Climate control functions in detail
Manual air distribution
Press the button repeatedly to select a
program:
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Upper body region and footwell.
▷ Footwell.
▷ Windows and footwell: driver's side only.
▷ Windows, upper body region and footwell:
driver's side only.
If the windows are fogged over, press the AUTO
button on the driver's side to utilize the conden‐
sation sensor.
Temperature
Turn the wheel to set the desired
temperature.
The automatic climate control achieves this
temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary
with the maximum cooling or heating capacity,
and then keeps it constant.
Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐
perature settings. The automatic climate control
will not have sufficient time to adjust the set
temperature.
AUTO program
Press the button.
Air volume, air distribution, and tem‐
perature are controlled automatically.
Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO
intensity, and outside influences, the air is di‐
rected to the windshield, side windows, upper
body, and into the footwell.
The cooling function, refer to page 133, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program so as to prevent window con‐
densation as much as possible.
Intensity of the AUTO program
With the AUTO program switched on, automatic
control of the air volume and air distribution can
be adjusted.
Press the left or right side of the button:
decrease or increase the intensity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Air volume, manual
To be able to manually adjust the air volume,
switch off the AUTO program first.
Press the left or right side of the button:
decrease or increase air volume.
The selected air volume is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
The air volume of the automatic climate control
may be reduced automatically to save battery
power.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Press the button.
Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
moved from the windshield and the front side
windows.
The air volume can be adjusted when the pro‐
gram is active.
If the windows are fogged over, additionally
switch on the cooling function or press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sensor.
Maximum cooling
Press the button.
Seite 132
Controls Climate control
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
The system is set to the lowest temperature,
maximum air flow and recirculated-air mode.
Air flows out of the vents for the upper body re‐
gion. Open them for this purpose.
Air is cooled as quickly as possible:
▷ At an external temperature of approx.
32 ℉/0 ℃.
▷ When the engine is running.
The air flow can be adjusted when the program
is active.
Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode
You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently within
the vehicle.
Press the button repeatedly to select
an operating mode:
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air con‐
trol: a sensor detects pollutants in the out‐
side air and controls the shut-off automati‐
cally.
▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐
manently blocked.
If the windows are fogged over, switch off the
recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO but‐
ton on the driver's side to utilize the condensa‐
tion sensor. Make sure that air can flow onto the
windshield.
Continuous recirculated-air mode
The recirculated-air mode should not be
used for an extended period of time, as the air
quality inside the vehicle deteriorates steadily.◀
Cooling function
The passenger compartment can only be
cooled with the engine running.
Press the button.
The air is cooled and dehumidified and,
depending on the temperature setting, warmed
again.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water, refer to page 152, develops
that exits underneath the vehicle.
Rear window defroster
Press the button.
The rear window defroster switches off
automatically after a certain period of time.
ALL program
Residual heat
The heat stored in the engine is used to heat the
interior.
Functional requirement
▷ Up to 20 minutes after the engine has been
switched off.
▷ Warm engine.
▷ The battery is sufficiently charged.
▷ External temperature below 77 ℉/25 ℃.
Switching on
1.
Switch off the ignition.
2. Press the right side of the button on
the driver's side.
is shown on the display of the automatic cli‐
mate control.
The interior temperature, air volume and air dis‐
tribution can be adjusted with the ignition
switched on.
Seite 133
Climate control Controls
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Switching off
At the lowest fan speed, press the left side of the
button on the driver's side.
on the display of the automatic climate control
goes out.
Switching the system on/off
Switching off
▷ Complete system:
At the lowest fan speed, press the
left side of the button on the driver's
side.
▷ On the front passenger side:
At the lowest fan speed, press the
left side of the button on the front
passenger side.
Switching on
Press any button.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from
the incoming air.
The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous
pollutants from the outside air that enters the
vehicle.
This combined filter should be replaced during
scheduled maintenance, refer to page 262, of
your vehicle.
Ventilation
Front ventilation
▷ Thumbwheels to vary the temperature, ar‐
row 1.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
row 2.
▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the
vents continuously, arrows 3.
Adjusting the ventilation
▷ Ventilation for cooling:
Adjust the vent to direct the air in your di‐
rection, such as if the vehicle interior is hot
from the sun.
▷ Draft-free ventilation:
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
Ventilation in rear, center
▷ Thumbwheels to vary the temperature, ar‐
row 1.
Toward blue: colder.
Seite 134
Controls Climate control
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Toward red: warmer.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
row 2.
▷ Thumbwheels for continuous opening and
closing of the vents, arrow 3.
Parked-car ventilation
The concept
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehicle
interior and lowers its temperature, if necessary.
The system can be switched on and off directly
or by using two preset switch-on times. It re‐
mains switched on for 30 minutes.
Operation can be performed via iDrive.
Parked-car ventilation
Using the preset switch-on time or when oper‐
ated directly: any external temperature.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly
1.
"Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate parked-car vent."
The symbol on the automatic climate control
flashes if the system is switched on.
The system continues to run for some time after
being switched off.
Preselecting the switch-on time
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
4. Set the desired time.
Activating the switch-on time
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2"
The symbol on the automatic climate control
lights up when the switch-on time is activated.
The symbol on the automatic climate control
flashes when the system has been switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to reactivated.
Seite 135
Climate control Controls
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Interior equipment
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Integrated universal remote
control
The concept
The integrated universal remote control can op‐
erate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled sys‐
tems such as garage door drives or lighting sys‐
tems. The integrated universal remote control
replaces up to 3 different hand-held transmit‐
ters. To operate the remote control, the buttons
on the interior rearview mirror must be program‐
med with the desired functions. The hand-held
transmitter for the particular system is required
in order to program the remote control.
During programming
During programming and before activat‐
ing a device using the integrated universal re‐
mote control, ensure that there are no people,
animals, or objects in the range of movement of
the remote-controlled device; otherwise, there
is a risk of injury or damage.
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-
held transmitter.◀
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packaging
or in the instructions of the system to be
controlled, the system is generally com‐
patible with the integrated universal remote
control.
If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ Your service center.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson
Controls, Inc.
Controls on the interior rearview mirror
▷ LED, arrow 1.
▷ Buttons, arrow 2.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming.
Programming
General information
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:
Press and hold the left and right button on
the interior rearview mirror simultaneously
for approximately 20 seconds until the LED
on the interior rearview mirror flashes. This
erases all programming of the buttons on
the interior rearview mirror.
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to
8 cm away from the buttons on the interior
Seite 136
Controls Interior equipment
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
rearview mirror. The required distance de‐
pends on the manual transmitter.
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button of
the desired function on the hand-held trans‐
mitter and the button to be programmed on
the interior rearview mirror. The LED on the
interior rearview mirror will begin flashing
slowly.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED
flashes more rapidly. When the LED is flash‐
ing faster, this indicates that the button on
the interior rearview mirror has been pro‐
grammed.
If the LED does not flash faster after at least
60 seconds, change the distance between
the interior rearview mirror and the hand-
held transmitter and repeat the step. Several
more attempts at different distances may be
necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds be‐
tween attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-held
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the
interior rearview mirror button and repeat‐
edly press and release the hand-held trans‐
mitter button for 2 seconds.
6.
To program other functions on other but‐
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
The systems can be controlled using the interior
rearview mirror buttons.
Special feature of the alternating-code
wireless system
If you are unable to operate the system after re‐
peated programming, please check if the sys‐
tem to be controlled features an alternating-
code system.
Read the system's operating manual, or press
the programmed button on the interior rearview
mirror longer. If the LED on the interior rearview
mirror starts flashing rapidly and then stays lit
constantly for 2 seconds, the system features
an alternating-code system. Flashing and con‐
tinuous illumination of the LED will repeat for
approximately 20 seconds.
For systems with an alternating-code system,
the integrated universal remote control and the
system also have to be synchronized.
Please read the operating manual of the system
being set up for information on how to syn‐
chronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second
person.
To synchronize:
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-
controlled system.
2. Program the relevant button on the interior
rearview mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
on the system being programmed. You have
approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the
interior rearview mirror for approximately
3 seconds and then release it. If necessary,
repeat this work step up to three times in or‐
der to finish synchronization. Once synchro‐
nization is complete, the programmed func‐
tion will be carried out.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror
button to be programmed.
3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED
starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held
transmitter for the system to be controlled
approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the
buttons on the interior rearview mirror. The
required distance depends on the manual
transmitter.
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the
desired function on the hand-held transmit‐
ter.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the interior
rearview mirror LED flashes more rapidly.
When the LED is flashing faster, this indi‐
cates that the button on the interior rearview
mirror has been programmed. The system
Seite 137
Interior equipment Controls
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
can then be controlled by the button on the
interior rearview mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at least
60 seconds, change the distance and repeat
the step. Several more attempts at different
distances may be necessary. Wait at least
15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-held
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the
interior rearview mirror button and repeat‐
edly press and release the hand-held trans‐
mitter button for 2 seconds.
Controls
Before operation
Before operating a system using the
integrated universal remote control, ensure that
there are no people, animals, or objects within
the range of movement of the remote-controlled
system; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or
damage.
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-
held transmitter.◀
The system, such as the garage door, can be
operated using the button on the interior rear‐
view mirror while the engine is running or when
the ignition is started. To do this, hold down the
button within receiving range of the system until
the function is activated. The interior rearview
mirror LED stays lit while the wireless signal is
being transmitted.
Deleting stored functions
Press and hold the left and right button on the
interior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐
proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes
rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The
functions cannot be deleted individually.
Ashtray/cigarette lighter
Front: open
Press the button.
Emptying
Take out the insert.
Lighter
Push in the lighter.
The lighter can be removed as
soon as it pops back out.
Danger of burns
Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
Switch off the ignition and take the remote con‐
trol with you when leaving the vehicle so that
children cannot use the lighter and burn them‐
selves.◀
Rear: open
Press on the cover.
Seite 138
Controls Interior equipment
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Emptying
Take out the insert.
Connecting electrical devices
Note
Do not plug the charger into the socket
Do not connect battery chargers to the
factory-installed sockets in the vehicle. Doing so
may result in damage to the vehicle.◀
Sockets
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the engine is running
or when the ignition is switched on. The total
load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at
12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable
connectors.
Center console
Press the button.
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
In the front passenger footwell
Socket is located below the glove compartment.
To access the socket: fold open the cover.
Center armrest
Remove cover.
Through-loading system
The concept
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down
the rear seat backrest.
The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts
at a ratio of 60 to 40.
The sides can be folded down separately or to‐
gether.
Notes
Danger of pinching
Before folding down the rear seat backr‐
ests, ensure that the area of movement of the
backrests is clear. Ensure that no one is located
in or reaches into the area of movement of the
Seite 139
Interior equipment Controls
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
rear seat backrests. Otherwise, injury or damage
may result.◀
Locking the backrest
Before driving with passengers in the rear
of the vehicle, make sure that the backrests are
engaged and thus locked in place. Otherwise,
the restraining effect of the safety belts may be
limited in an accident.◀
Preventing indentations
When folding down the rear seats, ensure
that the safety belt buckles are located in the
recesses provided form them in the seat. Oth‐
erwise they can create indentations in the back‐
rest.◀
Opening
1.
Unlock the belt lock of the center safety belt
in the rear using the latch plate of another
safety belt.
2. Insert the latch plate at the end of the belt
into the specially designated fixture on the
rear window shelf.
3. Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo
area to release the rear seat backrest.
4. The unlocked rear seat backrest moves for‐
ward slightly. Fold the backrest forward by
the head restraint.
Closing
1.
Return the rear seat backrest to the upright
seating position and engage it.
Ensure that the lock is securely en‐
gaged
Make sure that the lock engages properly
when folding back, otherwise transported
cargo could enter the passenger compart‐
ment during braking or evasive maneuvers
and endanger the vehicle occupants.◀
2. Release the belt tongue from the fixture on
the rear window shelf.
3. Insert the belt tongue in the belt lock of the
center safety belt. Make sure you hear the
latch plate engage.
To secure cargo, refer to page 154, with nets or
draw straps, the cargo area is fitted with lashing
eyes.
Seite 140
Controls Interior equipment
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Ski bag
Capacity
The ski bag can be used to transport up to four
pairs of skis with a length of up to 6 ft/2.10 m or,
depending on the binding, up to two snow‐
boards with a length of up to 5 ft/1.60 m.
Preparing and loading the ski bag
1. Fold open the center armrest on the inside.
2. Open the inside cover and cargo area by
pressing the button.
3. Lay out the ski bag.
4. Load the ski bag. If necessary, wrap the
sharp edges of the skis.
5. Insert the tongue plate into the belt buckle.
6. Tighten the retaining strap.
Securing the ski bag
Secure the ski bag by tightening the re‐
taining strap; otherwise, the contents could
present a source of danger to the passengers,
for example during braking or evasive maneu‐
vers.◀
Removing the ski bag
The ski bag can be removed entirely, e.g., to dry
quickly or to use other inserts.
1.
Pull the handle forward and lift the ski bag
out.
2. Close the cover in the cargo area.
Seite 141
Interior equipment Controls
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
More information on the various inserts available
can be obtained from your service center.
Seite 142
Controls Interior equipment
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Storage compartments
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Notes
No loose objects in the passenger com‐
partment
Do not stow any objects in the passenger com‐
partment without securing them; otherwise,
they may present a danger to occupants for in‐
stance during braking and avoidance maneu‐
vers.◀
Do not place anti-slip mats on the dash‐
board
Do not place anti-slip mats on the dashboard.
The mat materials could damage the dash‐
board.◀
Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the vehicle interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side, refer to page 143.
▷ Storage compartment in the front center
armrest, refer to page 144.
▷ Storage compartment in the rear center
armrest, refer to page 144.
▷ Compartments in the doors.
▷ Pockets on the backrests of the front seats.
▷ Net in the front passenger footwell.
Glove compartment
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment switches on.
Close the glove compartment again im‐
mediately
Close the glove compartment immediately after
use while driving; otherwise, injury may occur
during accidents.◀
Closing
Fold up the cover.
USB interface for data transfer
Connection for importing and exporting data on
USB devices, e.g.:
▷ Personal Profile settings, refer to page 31.
▷ Music collection, refer to page 198.
Observe the following when connecting:
Seite 143
Storage compartments Controls
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.
▷ Do not use the USB interface to recharge
external devices.
Front center armrest
Opening
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the front seats.
Press the buttons next to the lock.
Locking the storage compartment
The storage compartment in the armrest can be
locked with an integrated key to separately se‐
cure the trunk lid, refer to page 39, for example.
After the storage compartment is locked, the re‐
mote control can be handed out without the
integrated key, refer to page 30, for instance at
a hotel.
This prevents access to the storage compart‐
ment and to the cargo area.
Connection for an external audio
device
This can be used to connect an external audio
device, such as an MP3 player.
▷ AUX-IN port, refer to page 203.
▷ USB audio interface, refer to page 203.
Rear center armrest
The center armrest contains a storage compart‐
ment.
Folding down
Pull on the opener and fold the armrest forward.
Seite 144
Controls Storage compartments
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Opening
Pull on the handle and fold open the cover.
Clothes hooks
Two folding clothes hooks are provided in the
rear of the vehicle. To unfold them, press on the
top edge of the clothes hooks.
Do not obstruct view
When suspending clothing from the
hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driver's
vision.◀
No heavy objects
Do not hang heavy objects from the hooks;
otherwise, they may present a danger to pas‐
sengers during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers.◀
Cupholders
Notes
Shatter-proof containers and no hot
drinks
Use light and shatter-proof containers and do
not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the
increased danger of injury in an accident.◀
Unsuitable containers
Do not forcefully push unsuitable contain‐
ers into the cupholders. This may result in dam‐
age.◀
Center console
To open: press on the cover.
In the rear
In the center armrest.
The cupholder can be adjusted for three differ‐
ent container sizes.
To open: press the button.
To reduce in size: fold closed to the desired po‐
sition.
To close: fold all the way closed. The cupholder
must be closed before it can be opened fully.
Storage compartments in the
cargo area
Net
Small objects can be stowed in the net on the
rear cargo area trim.
Lashing eyes
To secure the cargo, refer to page 154, there
are lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Seite 145
Storage compartments Controls
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Seite 147
Storage compartments Controls
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information useful
in dealing with specific driving and operating
modes.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to
each other.
The following instructions will help achieve a
long vehicle life and good economy.
Engine and differential
Always obey the official speed limit.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
speed:
▷ For gasoline engine, 4,500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kickdown mode for the initial
miles.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac‐
tion potential until after an initial breaking-in pe‐
riod.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and discs. Drive moderately during this break-in
period.
Following part replacement
The same breaking in procedures should be ob‐
served if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
General driving notes
Closing the trunk lid
Drive with the trunk lid closed
Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐
wise, in the event of an accident or braking or
evasive maneuvers, passengers or other road
users may be injured or the vehicle may be dam‐
aged. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the
passenger compartment.◀
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
▷ Greatly increase the blower speed.
▷ Drive moderately.
Hot exhaust system
Hot exhaust system
High temperatures are generated in the
exhaust system.
Seite 150
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Do not remove the heat shields installed and
never apply undercoating to them. When driv‐
ing, standing at idle and while parking, take care
to avoid possible contact between the hot ex‐
haust system and any highly flammable materi‐
als such as hay, leaves, grass, etc. Such contact
could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of serious
personal injury as well as property damage.
Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, there
is the danger of getting burned.◀
Climate control windshield
The marked area is not covered with heat re‐
flective coating.
Use this area for garage door openers, devices
for electronic toll collection, etc.
Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle
Mobile communication devices in the ve‐
hicle
It is advised that you do not use mobile commu‐
nication devices, e.g., mobile phones, inside the
vehicle without connecting them directly to the
external antenna. Otherwise, the vehicle elec‐
tronics and mobile communication devices can
interfere with each other. In addition, there is no
assurance that the radiation generated during
transmission will be discharged from the vehicle
interior.◀
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐
duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀
Driving through water
Drive though calm water only if it is not deeper
than 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this height, no
faster than walking speed, up to 6 mph/10 km/h.
Adhere to water depth and speed limita‐
tions
Do not exceed this water depth and walking
speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the elec‐
trical systems and the transmission may be
damaged.◀
Braking safely
Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature.
Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
way of braking in situations when this is neces‐
sary.
The vehicle maintains steering responsiveness.
You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum
of steering effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
active mode.
Objects in the area around the pedals
No objects in the area around the pedals
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
impeded while driving
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
mats or other objects.
Seite 151
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Only use floor mats that have been approved for
the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened
again after they were removed for cleaning, for
example.◀
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly
exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every
few miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger other
road users.
The heat generated in this process helps dry the
brake discs and pads.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
Hills
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear
in which the least braking is required. Otherwise,
the brake system may overheat, resulting in a
reduction in the brake system efficiency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down in the manual mode of the auto‐
matic transmission.
Avoid load on the brakes
Avoid placing excessive load on the brake
system. Light but consistent brake pressure can
lead to high temperatures, brake wear and pos‐
sibly even brake failure.◀
Do not drive in neutral
Do not drive in neutral or with the engine
stopped, as doing so disables engine braking. In
addition, steering and brake assist is unavailable
with the engine stopped.◀
Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination
on the brake pads are furthered by:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure
that must be exerted by the pads during brake
applications to clean the discs is not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐
fect that generally cannot be corrected.
Condensation under the parked vehicle
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water develops that exits underneath
the vehicle.
Therefore, traces of condensed water under the
vehicle are normal.
Seite 152
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Loading
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
General information
Overloading the vehicle
To avoid exceeding the approved carrying
capacity of the tires, never overload the vehicle.
Overloading can lead to overheating and in‐
creases the rate at which damage develops in‐
side the tires. This could result in a sudden loss
of tire inflation pressure.◀
No fluids in the trunk
Make sure that fluids do not leak into the
trunk; otherwise, the vehicle may be damaged.◀
Determining the load limit
1.
Locate the following statement on your ve‐
hicle’s placard:
▷ The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the ve‐
hicle and unstable driving situations may
result.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY
pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs pas‐
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail‐
able cargo and luggage load capacity is
400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs = 400 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
Load
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Seite 153
Loading Driving tips
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Stowing cargo
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward and as low
as possible, ideally directly behind the cargo
area separating wall.
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to
stow cargo.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the
backrests.
▷ Place protective material around any sharp-
edged or pointed objects that could bump
against the rear window while the vehicle is
in motion.
Securing cargo
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
To secure the cargo, there are four lashing eyes
in the cargo area
Securing cargo
▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐
taining straps or with a cargo net or draw
straps.
▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with cargo
straps.
Cargo straps, cargo netting, retaining straps or
draw straps on the lashing eyes in the cargo
area.
Securing cargo
Always position and secure the cargo as
described above; otherwise, it can endanger the
car's occupants if sudden braking or swerving
becomes necessary.
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried
loose inside the car; otherwise, they could be
thrown around as a result of hard braking, sud‐
den swerves, etc., and endanger the occu‐
pants.◀
Seite 154
Driving tips Loading
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Saving fuel
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
General information
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐
sions.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
The implementation of certain measures, driv‐
ing style and regular maintenance can have an
influence on fuel consumption and on the envi‐
ronmental impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts
following use
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Close the windows and glass
sunroof
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
open results in increased air resistance and
raises fuel consumption.
Check the tire inflation
pressure regularly
Check and, if necessary, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before start‐
ing on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Drive away without delay
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the fastest way for the cold engine to
reach its operating temperature.
Look well ahead when driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle
driving ahead of you.
Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces
fuel consumption.
Use coasting conditions
When approaching a red light, take your foot off
the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt.
On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the ac‐
celerator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Seite 155
Saving fuel Driving tips
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Switch off the engine during
longer stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic
congestion.
Auto Start/Stop function
The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle au‐
tomatically switches off the engine during a
stop.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted
rather than leaving the engine running con‐
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are re‐
duced. Savings can begin within a few seconds
of switching off the engine.
Using this system can cause certain compo‐
nents of the vehicle to become worn prema‐
turely.
Iin addition, fuel consumption is also determined
by other factors, such as driving style, road con‐
ditions, maintenance or environmental factors.
Switch off any functions that
are not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear win‐
dow defroster require a lot of energy and con‐
sume additional fuel, especially in city and stop-
and-go traffic.
Therefore, switch off these functions if they are
not actually needed.
Have maintenance carried out
Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle economy and operating life.
Have the maintenance carried out by your serv‐
ice center.
Please also note the BMW Maintenance Sys‐
tem, refer to page 262.
ECO PRO
The concept
ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves on
fuel consumption. For this purpose, the engine
control and comfort functions, e. g. the climate
control output, are adjusted.
The extension of the range that is achieved as a
result can be displayed in the instrument cluster.
Activating ECO PRO
Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO
is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Display in the instrument cluster
ECO PRO bonus range
An extension of the range can be
achieved by an adjusted driving
style.
This may be displayed as the bo‐
nus range in the instrument clus‐
ter.
Configuring ECO PRO
Via the Driving Experience Switch
1.
"Settings"
2. "Driving mode"
3. "Configure ECO PRO"
4. Configure the program.
Seite 156
Driving tips Saving fuel
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Via the iDrive
1. "Settings"
2. "ECO PRO mode"
or
1. "Settings"
2. "Driving mode"
3. "Configure ECO PRO"
Configure the program.
ECO PRO Tip
▷ "ECO PRO limit:":
Set ECO Pro speed at which an ECO PRO
Tip is to be displayed.
▷ "ECO PRO speed warning":
A reminder is displayed if the set ECO PRO
speed is exceeded.
ECO PRO climate control
"ECO PRO climate control"
The climate control is adjusted to be fuel-effi‐
cient.
By making a slight change to the set tempera‐
ture, or adjusting the rate of heating or cooling
of the passenger compartment fuel consump‐
tion can be economized.
The output of the seat heater is also reduced.
ECO PRO Potential
The percentage of potential savings that can be
achieved with the current configuration is dis‐
played.
Indications on the Control Display
EfficientDynamics
Information on fuel consumption and technol‐
ogy can be displayed during driving.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "EfficientDynamics"
Displaying fuel consumption history
The average fuel consumption can be displayed
within an adjustable time frame.
"Consumption history"
Adjusting fuel consumption history
time frame
Select the symbol. Select the symbol.
Resetting fuel consumption history
1. Open "Options".
2. "Reset consumption history"
Displaying EfficientDynamics info
The current efficiency can be displayed.
"EfficientDynamics Info"
The following systems are displayed:
▷ Automatic engine Start/Stop function.
▷ Energy recovery.
▷ Climate control output.
Displaying ECO PRO Tips
"ECO PRO Tips"
The setting is stored for the profile currently in
use.
Seite 157
Saving fuel Driving tips
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Navigation
This chapter contains various examples of how
the navigation system can guide you reliably to
your destination.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Navigation system
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
General information
The navigation system can determine the pre‐
cise position of the vehicle, with the aid of sat‐
ellites and vehicle sensors, and can reliably
guide you to every entered destination.
Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and can
be updated.
Entries in stationary vehicle
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary, and always give priority to the applicable
traffic regulations in the event of any contradic‐
tion between traffic and road conditions and the
instructions issued by the navigation system.
Failure to take to this precaution can place you
in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants
and other road users in danger.◀
Starting navigation system
1.
Press the button on the controller.
2. "Navigation"
The navigation system can also be ac‐
cessed directly with the button on the con‐
troller.
Destination input
Manual destination entry
General information
The system supports you in entering street
names and house numbers by automatically
completing the entry and providing entry com‐
parisons, refer to page 21.
Stored town/city and street names can be called
up quickly.
▷ If the existing entries should not be changed,
the entries for the state/province and town/
city can be skipped.
▷ Destination guidance is started to the town/
city center if no street is entered.
Entering a state/province
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "State/Province" or the displayed
state/province.
Seite 160
Navigation Navigation system
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Entering a town/city
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis‐
played town/city.
2. Select letters, if applicable.
The list is narrowed down further with each
entry.
3. Move the controller to the right.
4. Select the town/city name from the list.
If there are several towns/cities with the same
name:
1.
Change to the list of town/city names.
2. Highlight the town/city.
3. Select the town/city.
Entering the postal code
1.
Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis‐
played town/city.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Select the numbers.
4. Change to the list of postal codes and towns/
cities.
5. Highlight the entry.
6. Selecting an entry.
Entering a street and intersection
1.
Select "Street" or the displayed street.
2. Enter a street and intersection in the same
way as you would enter a town/city.
If there are several streets with the same name:
1.
Change to the list of street names.
2. Highlight the street.
3. Select the street.
Alternative: enter the street address
and house number
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
2. Enter the street as you would the town/city.
3. "House number"
4. Select the numbers.
5. Change to the list of house numbers.
6. Select a house number or range of house
numbers.
Street does not exist in the destination
city/town
The desired street does not exist in the specified
city/town because it belongs to another part of
the city/town.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
4. Change to the list of street names.
5. Select "In" the displayed country.
All streets of the selected state/province are
offered. The associated town/city is dis‐
played after the street name.
6. Select the letters.
7. Change to the list of street names.
8. Highlight the street.
9. Select the street.
Seite 161
Navigation system Navigation
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Starting destination guidance after
entering the destination
1. "Accept destination"
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Add, refer to page 167, a destination as a
further destination.
Address book
Selecting a destination from the
address book
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Address book"
Contacts with addresses are displayed if
these have been checked as destinations
from among the Contacts.
3. Select a contact in the list or, if desired, with
"A-Z search".
4. If necessary, "Business address" or "Home
address"
Storing the destination in the address
book
After entering the destination, store the desti‐
nation in the address book.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Guidance"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
6. Select an existing contact, if available.
7. "Business address" or "Home address"
8. Enter "Last name" and, if applicable, "First
name".
9. "Store in vehicle"
Storing the position
The current position can be stored in the ad‐
dress book.
1.
"Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position
to contact"
4. Depending on the selection, choose an ex‐
isting contact from the list. Select the type
of address and enter the first and last names.
5. "Store in vehicle"
Editing or deleting an address
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Address book"
Seite 162
Navigation Navigation system
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
3. Highlight the entry.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry"
Using the home address as the
destination
The home address must be stored.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. "Home"
4. "Start guidance"
Last destinations
At a glance
The destinations previously entered are stored
automatically.
The destinations can be called up and used as a
destination for destination guidance.
Calling up the last destination
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
Starting destination guidance
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Select the destination.
4. "Start guidance"
Editing the destination
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit destination"
Deleting the last destinations
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last
destinations"
Special destinations
General information
Even with the most current navigation data, in‐
formation regarding particular individual desti‐
nations may have changed. For instance, certain
gas stations may not be operating.
Opening the search for special
destinations
To select special destinations such as hotels or
tourist attractions:
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Points of Interest"
3. Select the search function.
Seite 163
Navigation system Navigation
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
With the Professional navigation system:
Online Search
1. "Google™ Local Search"
2. Select a special destination.
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Start guidance"
A-Z search
1. "A-Z search"
2. "Town/City"
Select or enter the town/city.
3. "Category"
4. Select the category.
5. "Category details"
In the Professional navigation system: some
special destinations permit selection of mul‐
tiple category details. Move the controller to
the left to leave the category details.
6. "Keyword"
7. Enter the keyword.
A list of the special destinations is displayed.
8. Select a special destination.
Details are displayed.
If multiple details are stored, you can browse
through the pages.
If a phone number is available, a connection
can be established if necessary.
9. Select the symbol.
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Add a destination as a further destination,
refer to page 167.
"Start search": if a search term is not entered,
the search is repeated with the previous search
term.
Category search
1.
"Category search"
2. "Town/City"
Select or enter the town/city.
3. "Category"
4. Select the category.
5. "Category details"
In the Professional navigation system: some
special destinations permit selection of mul‐
tiple category details. Move the controller to
the left to leave the category details.
Some special destinations permit selection
of multiple category details. Move the con‐
troller to the left to leave the category de‐
tails.
6. "Start search"
A list of the special destinations is displayed.
7. Select a special destination.
Details are displayed.
If multiple details are stored, you can browse
through the pages.
If a phone number is available, a connection
can be established if necessary.
8. Select the symbol.
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Add a destination as a further destination,
refer to page 167.
Display of special destinations
List of special destinations: special destinations
are organized by distance and are displayed with
a directional arrow to the special destination.
With the Professional navigation system: on the
split screen, special destinations of the selected
category are displayed in the map view as sym‐
bols. The display depends on the scale of the
map and the category.
Destination entry via BMW Assist
A connection is established to the Concierge
service, refer to page 238.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
Seite 164
Navigation Navigation system
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
3. Open "Options".
4. "BMW Assist dest. entry"
Displaying special destinations in the
map
To display symbols of the special destinations
in the map view:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display Points of Interest"
5. Select the setting.
Destination entry by map
Selecting the destination
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
The current position of the vehicle is indi‐
cated on the map.
3. "Interactive map"
4. Select the destination with crosshairs.
▷ To change the scale: turn the controller.
▷ To shift the map: move the controller in
the required direction.
▷ To shift the map diagonally: move the
controller in the required direction and
turn it.
Specifying the street
If the system does not recognize a street, one of
the following is displayed:
▷ The name of a street nearby.
▷ The county.
▷ The coordinates of the destination.
Additional functions
Additional functions are available on the inter‐
active map after the controller is pressed.
▷ Select the symbol.
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
▷ "Exit interactive map": return to the map
view.
▷ "View in northern direction" or "View in
driving direction"
▷ "Display destination": the map section
around the destination is displayed.
▷ "Display current location": the map section
around your current location is displayed.
▷ "Find points of interest": the search for spe‐
cial destinations is started.
Destination entry by voice
General information
▷ Instructions for voice activation system, re‐
fer to page 22.
▷ When making a destination entry by voice,
you can change between voice operation
and iDrive.
▷ To have the available spoken instructions
read out loud: ›Voice commands‹
Seite 165
Navigation system Navigation
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Saying the entries
▷ With the Professional navigation system:
the town/city, street, and house number can
be entered as a single command.
▷ Countries, towns and cities, streets, and in‐
tersections can be said as whole words or
spelled, refer to page 80, in the language of
the system.
Example: to enter a town/city in a US state
as a whole word, the language of the system
must be English.
▷ Spell the entry if the spoken language and
the language of the system differ.
▷ Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exag‐
gerating the pronunciation and inserting
lengthy pauses between the letters.
▷ The options available for entering data de‐
pend on the navigation data and the country
and language settings.
With the Professional navigation
system: entering an address in a
command
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. ›Enter address‹
3. Wait for a request from the system.
4. Say the address in the suggested order.
5. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system.
If necessary, individually name the separate
components of the address, such as the town/
city.
Entering a town/city separately
The name of the town/city can be spoken as a
word or spelled out.
With the destination entry menu displayed:
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. ›City‹ or ›Spell city‹.
3. Wait for the system to prompt you for the
town/city.
4. Say the name of the town/city, or say at least
the first three letters.
Depending on the entry, up to 20 towns/cit‐
ies may be suggested.
5. Select the town/city.
▷ To select a recommended town/
city: ›Yes‹
▷ To select a different town/city: ›New
entry‹
▷ Select an entry: ›Entry ...‹ e.g., entry 2
▷ To spell an entry: ›Spell city‹
6. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system.
If there are several towns/cities with the same
name:
Towns/cities of the same name are grouped in a
list and displayed as one location followed by an
ellipsis.
1.
Select an entry: ›Yes‹ or ›Entry ...‹ e.g., en‐
try 2.
2. Select the desired town/city.
Entering a street or intersection
separately
Enter a street and intersection in the same way
as you would enter a town/city.
Entering a house number separately
Depending on the data in the navigation system,
house numbers up to number 2,000 can be en‐
tered.
1.
›House number‹
2. Say the house number.
Seite 166
Navigation Navigation system
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Say each digit separately.
3. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system.
Planning a trip with intermediate
destinations
New trip
A trip can be planned with several intermediate
destinations.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Move the controller to the left if necessary.
4. "Guidance"
5. "Enter new destination"
6. Select the type of destination entry.
7. Enter the intermediate destination.
8. "Start guidance"
Entering intermediate destinations
A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can
be entered for one trip.
1.
"Enter new destination"
2. Select the type of destination entry.
3. Enter the intermediate destination.
4. "Add as another destination"
The intermediate destination is entered in
the destination list and is highlighted.
5. Turn the controller until the intermediate
destination is located in the desired position
in the list.
6. Press the controller.
Starting the trip
1. After all intermediate destinations are en‐
tered, highlight the first destination.
If the second destination, for example, is
highlighted when destination guidance is
started, the first destination is skipped.
2. "Start guidance"
This symbol marks the active leg of the
trip.
With the Professional navigation
system: storing a trip
Up to 30 trips can be stored in the trip list. If
necessary, delete existing trips to be able to
store new trips.
1.
Open "Options".
2. "Store trip"
3. Enter the name.
4. "OK"
With the Professional navigation
system: selecting a stored trip
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. Select a stored trip.
4. "Start guidance"
Reversing the direction of travel
Intermediate destinations are displayed in re‐
verse order in the list.
1.
"Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Reverse order of trip dest."
Seite 167
Navigation system Navigation
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Intermediate destination options
1. "Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. "Display all trip destinations"
4. Select an intermediate destination.
▷ "Edit destination"
▷ "Reposition dest. in the trip": move an
intermediate destination to another po‐
sition in the list.
▷ "Delete dest. in the trip"
▷ "Go to next dest. in the trip"
Some options are not available for certain trips.
With the Professional navigation
system: deleting a stored trip
1.
"Stored trips"
2. Highlight the desired trip.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip"
With the Professional navigation
system: calling up the last trip
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. "Last trip"
4. "Start guidance"
Destination guidance
Starting destination guidance
1.
"Navigation"
2. Enter the destination, refer to page 160.
3. "Accept destination"
4. "Start guidance"
▷ The route is shown on the Control Display.
▷ The distance to the destination/intermedi‐
ate destination and the estimated time of ar‐
rival are displayed in the map view.
▷ The arrow view is shown in the instrument
cluster, in the Head-up Display, and on the
Control Display where appropriate.
Terminating destination guidance
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Guidance"
4. "Stop guidance"
Continuing destination guidance
If the destination was not reached during the last
trip, destination guidance can be resumed.
"Resume guidance"
Route criteria
General information
▷ The route calculated can be influenced by
selecting certain criteria.
▷ The route criteria can be changed when the
destination is entered and during destina‐
tion guidance.
▷ Road types are part of the navigation data
and are taken into consideration when plan‐
ning a route, such as when avoiding high‐
ways.
▷ The recommended route may differ from the
route you would take based on personal ex‐
perience.
▷ The settings are stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
▷ Destination guidance with traffic bulletins,
refer to page 174.
Changing the route criteria
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Route preference"
4. Select the criterion:
Seite 168
Navigation Navigation system
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
▷ "Fast route": time-optimized route,
being a combination of the shortest pos‐
sible route and the fastest roads.
▷ "ECO PRO route": optimized com‐
bination of the fastest and shortest
route.
▷ "Short route": short distance, irre‐
spective of how fast or slow progress will
be.
▷ "Alternative routes": if available, alter‐
native routes are suggested during ac‐
tive route guidance.
With the Professional navigation sys‐
tem: the individual suggestions are
highlighted in color.
5. Specify additional criteria for the route, if
necessary:
▷ "Avoid highways": highways are
avoided wherever possible.
▷ "Avoid toll roads": toll roads are avoided
wherever possible.
▷ "Avoid ferries": ferries are avoided
where possible.
Route
Different views of the route are available during
destination guidance:
▷ Arrow view in the instrument cluster and on
the Control Display.
▷ List of route sections.
▷ Map view, refer to page 170.
▷ Arrow view in the Head-up Display, refer to
page 129.
Arrow view
The following information is displayed during
destination guidance:
▷ Large arrow: current direction of travel.
▷ Street name of the currently traveled street.
▷ Small arrow: indicates the next change in di‐
rection.
▷ Intersection view.
▷ Lane information.
▷ Traffic bulletins.
▷ Distance to the next change in direction.
▷ Street name at the next change in direction.
Lane information
On multi-lane roads, the recommended lanes
are marked in the arrow view by a triangle.
▷ Solid triangle: best lane.
▷ Empty triangle: possible lane. However, an‐
other lane change may be needed shortly.
Displaying list of route sections
When destination guidance is activated, a list of
route sections can be displayed. The driving dis‐
tances and traffic bulletins are displayed for
each route section.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. Highlight route section.
With the Professional navigation system:
the route section is displayed on the split
screen.
Bypassing a section of the route
Calculate a new route for a route section.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Route information"
Seite 169
Navigation system Navigation
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
3. "New route for"
4. Turn the controller. Enter the number of
miles within which you would like to return
to the original route.
5. Press the controller.
Resuming the original route
If the route section should no longer be by‐
passed:
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "New route for:"
4. "Remove blocking"
Gas station recommendation
The remaining range is calculated, and if nec‐
essary gas stations along the route are dis‐
played.
Even with the most current navigation data, in‐
formation regarding individual gas stations may
have changed. For instance, certain gas stations
may not be operating.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "Recommended refuel"
A list of the gas stations is displayed.
4. Highlight a gas station.
With the Professional navigation system:
the position of the gas station is displayed
on the split screen.
5. Select the gas station.
6. Select the symbol.
7. "Start guidance": destination guidance to
the selected gas station is started.
"Add as another destination": the gas sta‐
tion is added to the route.
Switching spoken instructions on/off
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Voice instructions"
Repeating spoken instructions
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Highlight the symbol.
4. Press the controller twice.
Volume of spoken instructions
Turn the volume button while giving an instruc‐
tion until the desired volume is set.
Saving the spoken instructions on the
programmable memory buttons
The function for switching the spoken instruc‐
tions on/off can be stored on a programmable
memory button, refer to page 20, for quick ac‐
cess.
Map view
Selecting the map view
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
Seite 170
Navigation Navigation system
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
At a glance
1 Function bar
2 Route section with traffic obstruction
3 Traffic sign for traffic obstruction
4 Planned route
5 Current location
6 Upper status field
7 Lower status field
Lines in the map
Streets and routes are displayed in different col‐
ors and styles depending on their classification.
Dashed lines represent railways and ferry con‐
nections. Country borders are indicated by thin
lines.
Traffic obstructions
Small triangles along the planned route indicate
route sections with traffic obstructions, depend‐
ing on the map scale. The direction of the trian‐
gles indicates the direction of the obstruction.
The traffic signs indicate the significance of the
obstruction.
▷ Red traffic sign: the obstruction affects the
planned route or direction.
▷ Gray traffic sign: the obstruction does not
affect the planned route or direction.
Traffic bulletins, refer to page 172.
Planned route
After destination guidance is started, the plan‐
ned route is displayed on the map.
Status fields
Show/hide: press the controller.
▷ Upper status field: time, telephone, and en‐
tertainment details.
▷ Lower status field: symbol for active desti‐
nation guidance, status of traffic bulletins,
time of arrival, and distance to destination.
Function bar
The following functions are available in the func‐
tion bar:
Symbol Function
Start/end destination guidance.
Switch spoken instructions on/
off.
Change the route criteria.
Search for a special destination.
Display traffic bulletins.
Interactive map.
Set the map view.
Change the scale.
To change to the function bar, move the con‐
troller to the left.
Changing the map section
"Interactive map"
▷ To shift the map: move the controller in the
required direction.
▷ To shift the map diagonally: move the con‐
troller in the required direction and turn it.
Changing the scale
1.
Select the symbol.
2. To change the scale: turn the controller.
Seite 171
Navigation system Navigation
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Automatically scaled map scale
In the map view facing north, turn the controller
in any direction until the AUTO scale is dis‐
played. The map shows the entire route be‐
tween the current location and the destination.
Settings for the map view
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Settings"
Set the map view.
▷ "Day/night mode"
Select and create the necessary settings
depending on the light conditions.
"Traffic conditions/gray map" active: the
setting is disregarded.
▷ With the Professional navigation sys‐
tem:"Satellite images"
Depending on availability and resolution,
satellite images are displayed in a scale of
approx. 1 mile to 600 miles/2 km to
1,000 km.
▷ With the Professional navigation sys‐
tem:"Perspective view in 3D"
Prominent areas that are contained in the
navigation data are displayed on the map in
3D.
▷ "Traffic conditions/gray map"
The map is optimized for displaying traffic
bulletins, refer to page 172. Symbols for the
special destinations are no longer displayed.
With the Professional navigation
system: map view for split screen
The map view can be selected for the split
screen independently from the main screen.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the controller to the right repeatedly
until the split screen is selected.
4. Select "Split screen content" or the scale.
5. Select the map view.
▷ "Arrow display"
▷ "Map facing north"
▷ "Map direction of travel"
▷ "Map view with perspective"
▷ "Position"
▷ "Exit ramp view": selected blind drive‐
ways are displayed three dimensionally.
Setting in some cases will affect the dis‐
play in the Head-Up Display.
▷ "Traffic conditions/gray map"
6. To change the scale: select the split screen
and turn the controller.
Traffic bulletins
At a glance
General information
▷ Display the traffic bulletins from radio sta‐
tions that broadcast the TI Traffic Informa‐
tion of a traffic information service. Informa‐
tion on traffic obstructions and hazards is
updated continuously.
Certain BMW models equipped with navi‐
gation have the capability to display real-
time traffic information. If your system has
this capability the following additional terms
and conditions apply:
An End-User shall no longer have the right
to use the Traffic Data in the event that the
Seite 172
Navigation Navigation system
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
End-User is in material breach of the terms
and conditions contained herein.
A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear
Channel Broadcasting, Inc. (“Total Traffic
Network”) holds the rights to the traffic in‐
cident data and RDS-TMC network through
which it is delivered. You may not modify,
copy, scan or use any other method to re‐
produce, duplicate, republish, transmit or
distribute in any way any portion of traffic in‐
cident data. You agree to indemnify, defend
and hold harmless BMW of North America,
LLC. (“BMW NA”) and Total Traffic Net‐
work, Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates) against
any and all claims, damages, costs or other
expenses that arise directly or indirectly out
of (a) your unauthorized use of the traffic in‐
cident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b)
your violation of this directive and/or (c) any
unauthorized or unlawful activities by you in
connection herewith.
B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is infor‐
mational only. User assumes all risk of use.
Total Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their
suppliers make no representations about
content, traffic and road conditions, route
usability, or speed.
C. The licensed material is provided to li‐
censee “as is,” and “where is”. Total Traffic
Network, including, but not limited to, any
and all third party providers of any of the li‐
censed material, expressly disclaims, to the
fullest extent permitted by law, all warranties
or representations with respect to the li‐
censed material (including, without limita‐
tion, that the licensed material will be error-
free, will operate without interruption or that
the traffic data will be accurate), express, im‐
plied or statutory, including, without limita‐
tion, the implied warranties of merchanta‐
bility, non-infringement fitness for a
particular purpose, or those arising from a
course of dealing or usage of trade.
D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. or
BMW NA will be liable to you for any indirect,
special, consequential, exemplary, or inci‐
dental damages (including, without limita‐
tion, lost revenues, anticipated revenues, or
profits relating to the same) arising from any
claim relating directly or indirectly to use of
the traffic data, and even if Total Traffic Net‐
work, Inrix, Inc., or BMW NA are aware of the
possibility of such damages. These limita‐
tions apply to all claims, including, without
limitation, claims in contract and tort (such
as negligence, product liability and strict li‐
ability). Some states do not allow the exclu‐
sion or limitation of incidental or consequen‐
tial damages, so those particular limitations
may not apply to you.
▷ The traffic bulletins are indicated on the map
by symbols.
▷ The traffic bulletins for the surrounding area
are stored in a list.
The symbol in the function bar of the map
view turns red if there are traffic bulletins
that affect the calculated route.
Switching the reception on/off
1.
"Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Receive Traffic Info"
Opening the traffic bulletins
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Traffic Info"
First the traffic bulletins for the calculated
route are displayed. The traffic bulletins are
sorted by their distance from the current po‐
sition of the vehicle.
4. Select a traffic bulletin.
"More information": display additional
information.
5. Scroll to the next or previous traffic bulletin
if required.
Seite 173
Navigation system Navigation
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Traffic bulletins on the map
General information
"Traffic conditions/gray map" Active: indication
on the control display is switched to shades of
gray. This enables a better view of the traffic
bulletins. Day/night mode is not taken into ac‐
count in this setting. Symbols and special des‐
tinations are not displayed.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Settings"
5. "Traffic conditions/gray map"
Symbols in the map view
Depending on the scale of the map and the lo‐
cation of the traffic obstruction along the route,
the symbols for the traffic obstructions are dis‐
played.
Additional information in the map view
Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruc‐
tion's length, direction, and impact are displayed
in the map using triangles or gray bars along the
calculated route.
▷ Red: congestion.
▷ Orange: stop-and-go traffic.
▷ Yellow: heavy traffic.
▷ Green: clear roads.
▷ Gray: general traffic bulletins, e.g., construc‐
tion site.
The displayed information depends on the par‐
ticular traffic information service.
Filtering traffic bulletins
You can set which traffic bulletins appear on the
map.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Traffic Info categories"
5. Select the desired categories.
Traffic bulletins of the selected category are dis‐
played on the map.
▷ Traffic bulletins that are relevant to the route
are always shown.
▷ For your own safety, traffic bulletins that no‐
tify you of potentially dangerous situations,
such as wrong-way drivers, cannot be hid‐
den.
Destination guidance with traffic
bulletins
General information
Detour suggestions from the navigation system
can be manually accepted in the semi-dynamic
destination guidance. In the dynamic destina‐
tion guidance, they are automatically accepted
in the route guidance.
Semi-dynamic destination guidance
When traffic bulletin reception is switched on,
semi-dynamic destination guidance is active.
The destination guidance system takes the
available traffic information into account. A mes‐
sage is displayed depending on the route, the
traffic bulletins, and the possible detour routes.
When there is a traffic obstruction, if possible, a
detour is offered.
The top part of the message displays:
▷ The symbol of the first traffic obstruction,
including the distance at which the traffic
obstruction first occurs, if applicable.
Seite 174
Navigation Navigation system
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
▷ The overall length of the traffic obstructions
on the route.
▷ The extended driving time due to the traffic
obstructions.
The bottom part of the message displays:
▷ The recommended detour with the distance
remaining until the detour starts.
▷ The difference in the route length compared
to the original route.
▷ Time gained using the detour compared to
the original route with the traffic obstruc‐
tions.
With the Professional navigation system: in ad‐
dition to displaying the original route in white,
the split screen also displays the detour.
Accepting the detour
"Detour"
In the event of special hazards, e. g., objects on
the road, a message is displayed without a de‐
tour suggestion.
Detours can also be accepted if the traffic mes‐
sages are called up in the list.
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Traffic Info"
4. "Detour information"
5. "Detour"
Dynamic destination guidance
The route is automatically changed in the event
of traffic obstructions.
▷ The system does not point out traffic ob‐
structions along the original route.
▷ Traffic bulletins continue to be displayed on
the map.
▷ Depending on road type and the kind and
extent of the traffic obstruction, the calcu‐
lated route may lead through the traffic ob‐
struction.
▷ Dangerous situations are displayed regard‐
less of the setting.
Activating dynamic destination guidance
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Dynamic guidance"
Navigation data
Information on the navigation data
1.
"Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Navigation system version": information on
the data version is displayed.
Updating the navigation data
General information
Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and can
be updated.
Current navigation data and the authorization
code are available from your service center.
▷ Depending on the data volume, a data up‐
date may take several hours.
▷ Update during the trip to preserve battery.
▷ During the update, only the basic functions
of the navigation system are available.
▷ The status of the update can be viewed.
▷ The system restarts after the update.
▷ Remove the data carrier with the navigation
data after the update.
Professional navigation system:
performing an update
1.
Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD
player with the labeled side facing up.
2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
Seite 175
Navigation system Navigation
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
3. Enter the navigation DVD authorization
code.
4. Change the DVD, if necessary.
After interrupting your trip, follow the instruc‐
tions on the Control Display.
Viewing the status
1. Press the button.
2. "Navigation update"
What to do if...
▷ The current transmission position cannot be
displayed?
The vehicle is located in an unrecognized
region, is in a poor reception area, or the
system is currently determining the posi‐
tion. Reception is usually best when you
have an unobstructed view of the sky.
▷ The destination without street information is
not used for route guidance?
When city has been input, no downtown can
be determined.
Input any street in the selected city and start
destination guidance.
▷ The destination is not used for route guid‐
ance?
The destination data is not contained in the
navigation data. Select a destination that is
as close as possible to the original.
▷ Letters for destination input cannot be se‐
lected?
The stored data do not contain the data of
the destination.
Select a goal that is as close as possible to
the original.
▷ Is the map displayed in shades of gray?
"Traffic conditions/gray map" Active: indi‐
cation on the control display is switched to
shades of gray. This enables a better view of
the traffic bulletins.
▷ Spoken instructions are no longer output
during route guidance in front of intersec‐
tions?
The area has not yet been fully recorded, or
you have left the recommended route and
the system requires a few seconds to cal‐
culate a new route suggestion.
Seite 176
Navigation Navigation system
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Seite 177
Navigation system Navigation
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Entertainment
The chapter helps assure your enjoyment when
receiving radio and television stations and playing
CDs, DVDs and tracks from the music collection.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Tone
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
General information
The tone control and speaker lighting settings
are stored for the currently used remote control.
Treble, bass, balance, and
fader
▷ "Treble": treble adjustment.
▷ "Bass": depth adjustment.
▷ "Balance": left/right volume distribution.
▷ "Fader": front/rear volume distribution.
Setting treble, bass, balance, and fader
1.
"CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. Select the desired tone settings.
4. To adjust: turn the controller.
5. To store: press the controller.
Equalizer
Setting for individual audio frequency ranges.
Adjusting the equalizer
1.
"CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Equalizer"
4. Select the desired setting.
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Seite 180
Entertainment Tone
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Multi-channel playback,
surround
Choose between stereo and multi-channel play‐
back, surround.
Setting multi-channel playback,
surround
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Surround"
When surround is activated, multi-channel play‐
back is simulated when a stereo audio track is
played.
Bang & Olufsen High End
Surround Sound System
Tone control
1.
"CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Bang & Olufsen"
4. Select the desired tone settings.
▷ "Studio": studio tone settings.
▷ "Expanded": open space tone settings.
Adjusting speaker lighting
All speakers in the vehicle are illuminated. The
lighting can be individually set.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Bang & Olufsen"
4. Select the desired lighting setting.
▷ "Off": no lighting.
▷ "Reduced": all speakers in the field of
view are hidden while driving.
▷ "On": all speakers are always illumi‐
nated.
Center speaker
An additional speaker is present on the dash‐
board. When Entertainment is switched on, it
switches off automatically and is illuminated ac‐
cording to the lighting setting.
If Entertainment is switched off or muting is ac‐
tivated, the speaker breaks back in.
Volume
▷ "Speed volume": speed-dependent volume
control.
▷ With Bang & Olufsen High End Surround
Sound System: Automatic adjustment of
the volume depending on the driving noises,
e. g. wind noises, that can be heard in the
interior.
▷ "PDC": volume of the PDC signal compared
to the entertainment sound output.
▷ "Gong": volume of the signal, e. g., the safety
belt reminder, compared to the entertain‐
ment sound output.
▷ "Microphone": volume of the microphone
during a phone call.
▷ "Loudspeak.": volume of the loudspeakers
during a phone call.
The following volumes are only stored for the
respective paired telephone: "Microphone",
"Loudspeak.".
Adjusting the volume
1.
"CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
Seite 181
Tone Entertainment
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
3. "Volume settings"
4. Select the desired volume setting.
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Resetting the tone settings
1.
"CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Reset"
Seite 182
Entertainment Tone
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Radio
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Controls
1 Change entertainment sources
2 Change station/track
3 Programmable memory buttons
4 Volume, on/off
5 Change wave band
Sound output
Switching on/off
When the ignition is switched off: press ON/OFF
button on the radio.
Muting
When the ignition is switched on or the engine
is running: press the ON/OFF button on the
radio.
AM/FM station
Selecting a station
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Select the desired station.
All saved stations are stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
Changing the station
Press the button.
Storing a station
1.
"Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Highlight the desired station.
4. Press the controller for an extended period.
5. Select the desired memory location.
The stations are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Seite 183
Radio Entertainment
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
The stations can also be stored on the program‐
mable memory buttons, refer to page 20.
Selecting a station manually
Station selection via the frequency.
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. "Manual"
4. To select the frequency: turn the controller.
To store the station: press the controller for an
extended period.
Renaming a station
A station with changing station names can be
renamed.
1.
"Radio"
2. "FM"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Rename to:"
If necessary, wait until the desired name ap‐
pears.
The selected station name is copied to the list
of current stations and stored stations.
RDS
RDS broadcasts additional information, such as
the station name, in the FM wave band.
Switching the RDS on/off
1. "Radio"
2. "FM"
3. "Options" Open.
4. "RDS"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
HD Radio™ reception
Many stations broadcast both analog and digital
signals.
License conditions
HD Radio™ technology manufactured under li‐
cense from iBiquity Digital Corp. U. S. and For‐
eign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD and HD
Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiq‐
uity Digital Corp.
Activating/deactivating digital radio
reception
1.
"Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. "Options" Open.
4. "HD Radio Reception"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
This symbol is displayed in the status line
when the audio signal is digital.
When setting a station with a digital signal, it may
take a few seconds before the station plays in
digital quality.
Seite 184
Entertainment Radio
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
In areas in which the station is not continuously
received in digital mode, the playback switches
between analog and digital reception. In this
case, switch off digital radio reception.
Displaying additional information
Some stations broadcast additional information
on the current track, such as the name of the ar‐
tist.
1. Select the desired station.
2. "Options" Open.
3. "Station info"
Selecting a substation
This symbol indicates that a main station also
broadcasts additional substations. The station
name of the main station ends in HD1. Station
names of the substations end in HD2, HD3, etc.
1.
Select the desired station.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select the substation.
When reception is poor, the substation is muted.
Satellite radio
General information
The channels are offered in predefined pack‐
ages. The packages must be enabled by tele‐
phone.
Navigation bar overview
Symbol Function
Change the list view.
Select the category.
Direct channel entry
Timeshift
Open the My Favorites category/
open a favorite.
Symbol Function
Manage the favorites.
Traffic Jump
The functions of the navigation bar symbols can
also be stored on the programmable memory
buttons, refer to page 20.
Managing a subscription
To be able to enable or unsubscribe from the
channels, you must have reception. It is usually
at its best when you have an unobstructed view
of the sky. The channel name is displayed in the
status line.
Enabling channels
The Unsubscribed Channels category contains
all disabled channels.
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Category"
4. Select the Unsubscribed Channels cate‐
gory.
5. Select the desired channel.
Seite 185
Radio Entertainment
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
The phone number and an electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed.
6. Select the phone number to have the chan‐
nel enabled.
You can unsubscribe from the channels again
via this phone number.
Unsubscribing from channels
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Manage subscription"
5. The phone number and an electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed.
6. Call Sirius to unsubscribe from the chan‐
nels.
Selecting channels
You can only listen to enabled channels.
The selected channel is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Via iDrive
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate‐
gory.
4. Select the desired channel.
Via the buttons on the center console
Press the button.
The next channel is selected.
Via direct channel entry
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Set channel"
4. Turn the controller until the desired channel
is reached and press the controller.
Storing a channel
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de‐
sired category.
4. Select the desired channel.
5. Press the controller again.
Seite 186
Entertainment Radio
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
6. Press the controller again to confirm the
highlighted channel.
7. Select the desired memory location.
The channels are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
The channels can also be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons, refer to page 20.
Changing the list view
The list view changes every time the first symbol
on the navigation bar is pressed.
Information on the channel is displayed.
Symbol Meaning
Channel name
Artist
Track
Selecting a category
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Category"
4. Select the desired category.
Timeshift
Approx. one hour of the program being broad‐
cast on the channel currently being listened to
is stored in a buffer. Prerequisite: the signal must
be available.
The stored audio track can be played with a de‐
lay following the live broadcast. When the buffer
is full, the older tracks are overwritten. The buf‐
fer is cleared when a new channel is selected.
Opening the timeshift function
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Replay - Time shift"
▷ The red arrow shows the current playback
position.
▷ The time difference to the live broadcast is
displayed next to the buffer bar.
For live transmissions: "live".
Timeshift menu
Symbol Function
Go to the live broadcast
Playback/pause
Next track
Previous track
Fast forward
Reverse
Automatic timeshift deactivated/ac‐
tivated
Automatic timeshift
When the function is activated, audio playback
is stopped automatically in the event of:
▷ Incoming and outgoing telephone calls.
▷ Activation of the voice activation system.
Seite 187
Radio Entertainment
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
▷ Muting.
The audio playback then continues with a time
delay.
To activate:
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Replay - Time shift"
4. "Automatic time shift"
To deactivate: "Automatic time shift".
Storing favorites
Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favorites
list. Available favorites are artist, track, game,
league, and team.
Storing the artist, track, or game
It is only possible to store favorites that are cur‐
rently being broadcast. The channel information
must be available.
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de‐
sired category.
4. Select the desired channel.
5. Press the controller again.
6. Select the artist, track, or game.
Storing the league or team
Leagues or teams can be added to the favorites
from a selection list.
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Manage favorites"
4. "Add sports information"
5. Select the league.
6. Select "Add all teams" or the desired team.
Opening the favorites
If an activated favorite is played back, the fol‐
lowing message appears for approx. 20 sec‐
onds: "Favorite alert!".
"Favorites"
Select the symbol while the message is shown.
The displayed favorite is played.
If there is no message, the system changes to
the My Favorites category. All favorites currently
being broadcast can be selected from a list.
Managing the favorites
Activating/deactivating the favorites
Favorites can be activated and deactivated
globally and individually.
1.
"Satellite radio"
2. "Manage favorites"
3. Select "Activate alert" or the desired favor‐
ites.
Seite 188
Entertainment Radio
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Deleting favorites
1. "Satellite radio"
2. "Manage favorites"
3. Highlight the desired favorite.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
Traffic Jump
Traffic and weather information for a selected
region is broadcast every few minutes.
Selecting a region
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Set jump"
5. Select the desired region.
The region is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Activating/deactivating the jump
1.
"Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Jump to:"
Information for the selected region is broadcast
as soon as it is available.
A new panel opens.
Canceling the Traffic Jump: "Cancel".
Symbol Meaning
Information will be broadcast shortly.
Information is currently being broad‐
cast.
Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic
Jump.
Automatic update
About twice a year, Sirius performs an update of
the channel names and positions. The update
takes place automatically and may take several
minutes.
Notes
▷ Reception may not be available in some sit‐
uations, such as under certain environmen‐
tal or topographic conditions. The satellite
radio has no influence on this.
▷ The signal may not be available in tunnels or
underground garages next to tall buildings
or near trees, mountains or other powerful
sources of radio interference.
Stored stations
General information
It is possible to store up to 40 stations.
Calling up a station
1.
"Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
Storing a station
The station currently selected is stored.
1.
"Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. "Store station"
4. Select the desired memory location.
Seite 189
Radio Entertainment
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
The list of stored stations is stored for the re‐
mote control currently in use.
The stations can also be stored on the program‐
mable memory buttons, refer to page 20.
Deleting a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
4. "Options" Open.
5. "Delete entry"
Seite 190
Entertainment Radio
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
CD/multimedia
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Controls
1 Change the entertainment source
2 CD/DVD drive
3 Eject CD/DVD
4 Change station/track
5 Programmable memory buttons
6 Volume, on/off
Sound output
Switching on/off
When the ignition is switched off: press ON/OFF
button on the radio.
Muting
When the ignition is switched on or the engine
is running: press the ON/OFF button on the
radio.
CD/DVD
Playback
Loading the CD/DVD player
Insert the CD/DVD with the printed side up.
Playback begins automatically.
Reading can take a few minutes with com‐
pressed audio files.
Starting playback
A CD/DVD is located in the CD/DVD player or
DVD changer.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD player
... DVD changer
Playable formats
▷ DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-
RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD
audio (video part only), DVD video.
▷ CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA, VCD,
SVCD.
▷ Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC,
M4A.
Seite 191
CD/multimedia Entertainment
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
CD/DVD removal
1. Press the button.
The CD/DVD is partially ejected.
2. Remove the CD/DVD.
Audio playback
Selecting the track using the button
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired track is played.
Selecting a track via iDrive
Audio CDs
Select the desired track to begin playback.
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files
Depending on the data, some letters and num‐
bers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed cor‐
rectly.
1.
Select the directory if necessary.
To go up a level in the directory: move the
controller to the left.
2. Select the desired track to begin playback.
Displaying information on the track
If information about a track has been stored, it is
displayed automatically:
▷ Interpret.
▷ Album track.
▷ Number of tracks on the CD/DVD.
▷ File name of track.
Random playback
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
Seite 192
Entertainment CD/multimedia
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
4. Open "Options".
5. "Random"
All tracks of the CD/DVD are played back in ran‐
dom order.
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button.
Video playback
Country codes
Only DVDs with the code of the home region can
be played back; also refer to the information on
the DVD.
Code Region
1 USA, Canada
2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Af‐
rica
3 Southeast Asia
4 Australia, Central and South America,
New Zealand
5 Northwest Asia, North Africa
6 China
0 All regions
Playback
The video image is displayed on the front Con‐
trol Display up to a speed of approx.
2 mph/3 km/h; in some countries, it is only dis‐
played if the parking brake is set or if the auto‐
matic transmission is in position P.
DVD video
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select a DVD with video content.
4. "DVD menu"
VCD/SVCD
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select a CD with video content.
4. "Select track"
5. Select the desired track.
Video menu
To open the video menu: turn the controller dur‐
ing playback.
Press the controller when "Back" is displayed.
Symbol Function
Open the DVD menu.
Start playback.
Pause
Stop
Next chapter
Previous chapter
Seite 193
CD/multimedia Entertainment
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Symbol Function
Fast forward
Reverse
In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases ev‐
ery time the controller is pressed. To stop, start
playback.
DVD menu
1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the
video menu.
2. "DVD menu"
The DVD menu is displayed. The display de‐
pends on the contents of the DVD.
3. To select menu items: move the controller
and press it.
To change to the video menu: turn the controller
and press it.
DVD/VCD settings
For some DVDs, settings can only be made via
the DVD menu; refer also to the information on
the DVD.
Selecting the language
The languages that are available depend on the
DVD.
1.
Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Audio/language"
4. Select the desired language.
Selecting the subtitles
The subtitles that are available depend on the
DVD.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Subtitles"
4. Select the desired language or "Do not
display subtitles".
Setting the brightness, contrast and color
1.
Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Display settings"
4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color"
5. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Selecting the zoom
Display the video image on the entire screen.
1.
Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
Seite 194
Entertainment CD/multimedia
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
3. "Additional options"
4. "Zoom mode"
Selecting a track
DVD video:
1.
Turn the controller when the DVD menu is
displayed.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Select title"
5. Select the desired track.
VCD/SVCD:
1.
"Select track"
2. Select the desired track.
Selecting the camera angle
The availability of a different camera angle de‐
pends on the DVD and the current DVD track.
1.
Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Viewing angle"
5. Select the desired camera angle.
Opening the main menu, back
These functions are not contained on every
DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for
use.
DVD changer
In the glove compartment
Pull the handle.
Controls and displays
1 Empty DVD compartments
2 LED on DVD slot
3 Buttons for DVD compartments
4 DVD slot
5 Load DVD compartments
Loading the DVD compartments
individually
1.
Press the button once.
The LED on the first empty compartment
flashes.
2. Select another compartment if necessary.
3. Wait for the LEDs on the DVD slot to flash.
4. Insert a single CD or DVD in the middle.
The CD/DVD is drawn in automatically and
placed into the selected compartment.
Seite 195
CD/multimedia Entertainment
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Sliding in CDs/DVDs
Do not insert the CD/DVD until the LEDs
on the DVD slot are flashing; otherwise, the CD/
DVD or the DVD changer could be damaged.
Do not continue to push on the CD/DVD; this
may cause it to jam and prevent it from being
able to eject again.◀
Loading all empty DVD compartments
1. Press the button once and hold it
down.
The LEDs on the empty CD compartments
flash.
2. Wait for the LEDs on the DVD slot to begin
flashing and then insert each CD or DVD into
the center of the slot.
The CDs/DVDs are drawn in automatically
and placed into the empty compartments.
Sliding in CDs/DVDs
Do not insert the CD/DVD until the LEDs
on the DVD slot are flashing; otherwise, the CD/
DVD or the DVD changer could be damaged.
Do not continue to push on the CD/DVD; this
may cause it to jam and prevent it from being
able to eject again.◀
After they are inserted, it may take several mi‐
nutes for the CDs/DVDs to be read in.
Removing a single CD/DVD
1.
Press the button once.
2. Select the DVD compartment.
The CD/DVD is partially ejected.
3. Remove the CD/DVD.
Removing all CDs/DVDs
1.
Press the button once and hold it down.
2. Remove the CDs/DVDs.
Cancelling a function
Filling the DVD compartments or removing CDs/
DVDs can be canceled.
Press the corresponding button.
▷
▷
Malfunctions
If the LEDs on the DVD slot and on the com‐
partments are flashing rapidly, a malfunction has
occurred.
To eliminate the malfunction:
1.
Press one of the following buttons:
▷
▷
The CD/DVD last inserted is ejected.
2. Remove the CD/DVD.
The DVD changer is functional again after the
LEDs stop flashing rapidly.
Audio playback
The audio track of a DVD can be played back
even if video playback is not possible in the ve‐
hicle.
Only the main film without the previews or extras
can be played back.
Starting playback
A DVD is located in the DVD changer.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired DVD.
Selecting a chapter using the button
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired chapter is played.
Seite 196
Entertainment CD/multimedia
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Selecting a chapter using iDrive
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired DVD.
4. Select the desired chapter.
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button.
Selecting the language
The languages that are available depend on the
DVD.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired DVD.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Audio/language"
6. Select the desired language.
Notes
CD/DVD player and changer
Do not remove the cover
BMW CD/DVD players and changers are
officially designated Class 1 laser products. Do
not operate if the cover is damaged; otherwise,
severe eye damage may occur.◀
CDs and DVDs
Use of CDs/DVDs
▷ Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs
with labels applied, as these can be‐
come detached during playback due
to heat buildup and can cause irrepar‐
able damage to the device.
▷ Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play
CDs/DVDs with an adapter, e.g., single CDs;
otherwise, the CDs or the adapter may jam
and no longer eject.
▷ Do not use combined CDs/DVDs, e.g., DVD
Plus, as the CDs/DVDs can jam and will no
longer eject.◀
General malfunctions
▷ CD/DVD changers and players have been
optimized for performance in vehicles. In
some instances they may be more sensitive
to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary devices
would be.
▷ If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check
whether it has been inserted correctly.
Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensation
on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens, and
temporarily prevent playback.
Malfunctions involving individual CDs/
DVDs
If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/
DVDs, this can be due to one of the following
causes:
Home-recorded CDs/DVDs
▷ Possible reasons for malfunctions with
home-recorded CDs/DVDs are inconsistent
data creation or recording processes, or
poor quality or old age of the blank CD/DVD.
▷ Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side with
a pen intended for this purpose.
Damage
▷ Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and
moisture.
▷ Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve.
▷ Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures
over 122 ℉/50 ℃, high humidity or direct
sunlight.
Seite 197
CD/multimedia Entertainment
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
CDs/DVDs with copy protection
CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro‐
tection feature by the manufacturer. This can
mean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played or
can only be played to a limited extent.
MACROVISION
This product contains copyrighted technology
that is based on multiple registered US patents
and the intellectual property of the Macrovision
Corporation and other manufacturers. The use
of this copy protection must be approved by
Macrovision. Media protected by this product -
unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision - may
only be used for private purposes. Copying of
this technology is prohibited.
DTS Digital Surround™
Manufactured under license under U.S.
Patent Numbers: 5,451,942;
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 &
and other patents granted and registered in the
USA and worldwide. DTS and the logo are reg‐
istered trademarks & DTS Digital Surround and
the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS Inc. ©
DTS, Inc. All rights reserved.
Music collection
Storing music
General information
Music tracks from CDs/DVDs and USB devices
can be stored in the music collection on a hard
disc in the vehicle and played from there.
▷ Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com‐
pressed audio format. If available, informa‐
tion on the album, such as the artist, is
stored as well.
▷ CD/DVD or USB device with compressed
audio files: the entire content of the CD/DVD
or the USB device is stored in the vehicle as
an album. The WMA, MP3, M4A, and AAC
formats are stored. Individual tracks and di‐
rectories can be deleted later, Deleting a
track and directory, refer to page 202.
Tracks with DRM copy protection can be
stored but cannot be played back.
Backing up music data
Regularly back up the music data; other‐
wise, it could be lost if there is a fault on the hard
disk.◀
Music recognition technology and re‐
lated data are provided by Gracenote®.
Gracenote is the industry standard in music rec‐
ognition technology and related content deliv‐
ery. For more information, please visit
www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,
copyright © 2000-2009 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2009 Gracenote.
This product and service may practice one or
more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;
#6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,
#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pend‐
ing. Some services supplied under license from
Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
Storing from a CD/DVD
1.
Insert a CD or DVD into the CD/DVD player.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "CD/DVD"
4. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player.
5. "Store in vehicle"
The music collection is displayed and the first
track of the CD/DVD is played back. During the
Seite 198
Entertainment CD/multimedia
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
storage process, the tracks are played in se‐
quence.
Observe the following during the storage proc‐
ess:
Do not switch to the CD/DVD player and do not
remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD player as
this will interrupt the storage process. You can
switch to the other audio sources without inter‐
rupting the storage process. Tracks from the
current CD/DVD that have already been stored
can be called up.
Interrupting storage
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. "Storing..."
4. "Cancel storing"
The storage process is interrupted and can be
continued at any time.
Continuing the storage process
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player.
4. "Continue storing"
Storage of the CD/DVD continues at the begin‐
ning of the track at which storage was inter‐
rupted.
Album information
During storage, information such as the name of
the artist is stored with the track, if this informa‐
tion is available in the vehicle database or on the
CD.
To update the database, contact your service
center.
Storing from a USB device
To store music, a suitable device must be con‐
nected to the USB interface in the glove com‐
partment.
▷ Suitable devices: USB mass storage devi‐
ces, such as USB flash drives or MP3 players
with a USB interface.
▷ Unsuitable devices: USB hard drives, USB
hubs, USB memory card readers with mul‐
tiple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone. Music from
the Apple iPod/iPhone can be played via the
USB audio interface in the center armrest.
▷ File systems: popular file systems for USB
devices are supported. FAT 32 is the rec‐
ommended format.
1. Connect the USB device to the USB inter‐
face in the glove compartment, refer to
page 143.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "Music collection"
4. "Options" Open.
5. "Music data import/export"
6. "Import music (USB)"
Playing music
Music search
All tracks for which additional information has
been stored can be accessed by the music
Seite 199
CD/multimedia Entertainment
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
search. Tracks without additional information
can be called up via the corresponding album,
refer to page 201.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Music search"
4. Select the desired category.
5. Select the desired entry:
▷ Select "A-Z search", refer to page 21,
and input the desired entry.
▷ Select the desired entry from the list.
6. Select other categories if you wish.
The tracks found are listed in alphabetical
order.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, to search for all tracks by a certain
artist, call up that artist only. All of the tracks
by that artist are then displayed.
7. "Start play"
The list of tracks is repeated automatically.
Restarting the music search
"New search"
Music search using spoken instructions
Instructions for the voice activation system, re‐
fer to page 22.
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. ›Music search‹
3. Open the desired category, e.g., ›Select
artist‹.
4. Say the desired entry in the list.
5. Select other categories if you wish.
To select a track directly: ›Title ...‹.
Say the voice command and the name of the
desired track in a single command.
Current playback
The list of tracks that was generated last by the
music search, or the album that was selected
last.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Current playback"
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
Top 50
The 50 most frequently played tracks.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Top 50"
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
Seite 200
Entertainment CD/multimedia
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Albums
All stored albums, listed in order of their storage
dates.
Symbol Format
Audio CD
Compressed audio files
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Select the desired album.
Depending on the album, the tracks or the
subdirectories of the album are displayed.
The first track is played automatically, if pos‐
sible.
4. Change directories if needed to select
tracks.
To go up a level in the directory: move the
controller to the left.
Random playback
All tracks of the selection are played back in ran‐
dom order.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Random"
Managing music
Albums
Renaming an album
The name of the album, if available, is automat‐
ically entered when the album is stored. If the
name is not available, it can be changed later if
desired.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the desired album.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Rename album"
6. Select the letters individually.
Seite 201
CD/multimedia Entertainment
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Deleting an album
An album cannot be deleted while a track from
that album is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the desired album.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete album"
Deleting a track and directory
A track cannot be deleted while it is being
played.
A directory cannot be deleted while a track from
that directory is being played.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the directory or track.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track"
Free memory capacity
Display the free memory capacity in the music
collection.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Free memory"
Music collection
Backing up the music collection
The entire music collection can be stored on a
USB device. Make sure there is enough free
memory capacity on the USB device.
Depending on the number of tracks, backing up
the music collection may take several hours.
Therefore, it is best to perform the backup dur‐
ing a long trip.
1. Starting the engine.
2. Connect the USB device to the USB inter‐
face in the glove compartment.
3. "CD/Multimedia"
4. "Music collection"
5. Open "Options".
6. "Music data import/export"
7. "Backup music on USB"
Storing the music collection in the vehicle
When storing from the USB device, the existing
music collection in the vehicle is replaced.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Music data import/export"
5. "Restore music from USB"
Seite 202
Entertainment CD/multimedia
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Deleting the music collection
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete music collection"
External devices
At a glance
Symbol Meaning
AUX-IN port
USB audio interface
Mobile phone audio interface
Bluetooth audio
AUX-IN port
At a glance
▷ For connecting audio devices, e.g., MP3
player. The sound is output on the vehicle
loudspeakers.
▷ Recommendation: use medium tone and
volume settings on the audio device. The
tone depends on the quality of the audio
files.
Connecting
The AUX-IN port is located in the center armrest.
Connect the headphones or line-out connector
of the device to the jack plug.
Playback
1. Connect the audio device, switch it on and
select a track on the audio device.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. If necessary, "External devices".
4. "AUX front"
Volume
The volume of the sound output is dependent
on the audio device. If this volume differs mark‐
edly from the volume of the other audio sources,
it is advisable to adjust the volumes.
Adjusting the volume
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. If necessary, "External devices".
3. "AUX front"
4. "Volume"
5. Turn the controller until the desired volume
is set and press the controller.
USB audio interface/mobile phone
audio interface
At a glance
It is possible to connect external audio devices.
Operation can be performed via iDrive. The
sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
Connectors for external devices
▷ Connection via USB audio interface: Apple
iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g., MP3 play‐
Seite 203
CD/multimedia Entertainment
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
ers, USB flash drives, or mobile phones that
are supported by the USB audio interface.
▷ Connection via snap-in adapter when equip‐
ped with extended connectivity of the music
player in the mobile phone: Apple iPhone or
mobile phones.
Playback is only possible when there is no
audio device attached to the AUX-IN port.
Due to the large number of different audio devi‐
ces available on the market, it cannot be ensured
that every audio device/mobile phone is opera‐
ble on the vehicle.
Ask your service center about suitable audio de‐
vices/mobile phones.
Audio files
Standard audio files can be played back:
▷ MP3.
▷ WMA.
▷ WAV (PCM).
▷ AAC, M4A.
▷ Playback lists: M3U, WPL, PLS.
File systems
Popular file systems for USB devices are sup‐
ported. FAT 32 is the recommended format.
Connection of Apple iPod/iPhone via
USB audio interface
USB audio interface is located in the center arm‐
rest.
Connect using a flexible adapter cable.
Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone
to the USB interface.
The Apple iPod/iPhone menu
structure is supported by the
USB audio interface.
Connection of a USB device via the
USB audio interface
USB audio interface is located in the center arm‐
rest.
Connect using a flexible adapter cable to protect
the USB audio interface and the USB device
against physical damage.
Connect the USB device to the
USB interface.
After connecting for the first time
Information on all music tracks, e.g. artist or type
of music, as well as playback lists are transmit‐
ted into the vehicle. This may take some time,
depending on the USB device and the number
of tracks.
During transmission, the tracks can be called up
via the file directory.
Number of tracks
Information from up to four USB devices or for
approx. 36,000 tracks can be stored in the ve‐
hicle. If a fifth device is connected or if more than
36,000 tracks are stored, information on exist‐
ing music tracks may be deleted.
Seite 204
Entertainment CD/multimedia
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Copy protection
Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Man‐
agement (DRM) cannot be played.
Playback
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
The playback starts with the first track.
On the split screen, the CD cover for the music
track might be displayed after a few seconds.
Track search
Selection is possible via:
▷ Playback lists.
▷ Information: type of music, artist, and, if
available, composer, album, track.
▷ In addition, for USB devices: file directory
and, if available, composer.
Tracks are displayed if they have been saved in
the Latin alphabet.
Starting the track search
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. "Search"
5. Select the desired category, e.g., "Genre" or
"Artist".
All entries are displayed in a list.
▷ Open "A-Z search" and input the de‐
sired entry. When a letter is entered, the
results are filtered using this letter as the
first letter. If multiple letters are entered,
all results that contain that sequence are
displayed.
▷ Select the desired entry from the list.
6. Select other categories if you wish.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, if all of the tracks by a certain artist
are to be displayed, call up that artist only.
All of the tracks by that artist are then dis‐
played.
7. "Start play"
Restarting a track search
"New search"
Playback lists
Calling up playback lists.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. "Playlists"
Current playback
List of tracks currently being played.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. "Current playback"
Seite 205
CD/multimedia Entertainment
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Random playback
The current list of tracks is played back in ran‐
dom order.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Random"
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button.
Video playback
At a glance
Video playback via snap-in adapter is possible.
Operation can be performed via iDrive. The
sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
Playback
The video image is displayed on the front Con‐
trol Display up to a speed of approx.
2 mph/3 km/h; in some countries, it is only dis‐
played if the parking brake is set or if the auto‐
matic transmission is in position P.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Video"
5. Select the directory if necessary.
To go up a level in the directory: move the
controller to the left.
6. Select the desired video file to begin play‐
back.
Video menu
Symbol Function
Next video file
Previous video file
Double-click on an icon to play back
previous video file.
Notes
Do not expose the audio device to extreme en‐
vironmental conditions, such as very high tem‐
peratures; refer to the audio device operating
instructions.
Depending on the configuration of the audio
files, e.g., bit rates greater than 256 kbit/s, the
files may not play back correctly in each case.
Information on connection
▷ The connected audio device is supplied with
a max. power of 500 mA if supported by the
device. Therefore, do not additionally con‐
nect the device to a socket in the vehicle;
otherwise, playback may be compromised.
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB audio interface.
▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.
▷ Do not use the USB audio interface to re‐
charge external devices.
Bluetooth audio
At a glance
▷ Music files on external devices such as audio
devices or mobile phones can be played
back via Bluetooth.
Use of a mobile phone as an audio source,
refer to page 215.
▷ The sound is output on the vehicle loud‐
speakers.
Seite 206
Entertainment CD/multimedia
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
▷ The volume of the sound output is depend‐
ent on the device. If necessary, adjust the
volume on the device.
▷ Up to four external devices can be paired
with the vehicle.
Requirements
▷ The device is suitable. Information under
www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
▷ The device is ready for operation.
▷ The ignition is switched on.
▷ Bluetooth is activated on the vehicle, refer to
page 215, and on the device.
▷ Bluetooth presettings must be made on the
device, such as for a connection without
confirmation or visibility; refer to the device
operating instructions.
▷ A number with at least four and a maximum
of 16 digits is defined as the Bluetooth pass‐
key. It is only required once for pairing.
Pairing and connecting
Pairing a device
To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi‐
cle's occupants and to other road users, only
pair the device while the vehicle is stationary.◀
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio".
4. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
played.
5. Perform additional steps on the device, refer
to the device operating instructions: e.g.
search for or connect the Bluetooth device
or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the device display.
6. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the device display.
Prompt via iDrive or the device to enter the
same Bluetooth passkey.
7. Enter the passkey and confirm.
8. Select the desired functions with which the
device is to be connected, e.g. "Audio".
9. "OK"
Seite 207
CD/multimedia Entertainment
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
If pairing was successful, the device is displayed
as connected.
White symbol : the device is active as an audio
source.
If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., refer
to page 209.
Connecting a specific device
A device that has already been paired can be
connected as an active audio source.
Connecting is not possible when data is ex‐
changed via a mobile phone connected via Blue‐
tooth.
Requirements
If necessary, activate the audio connection of
the desired device from the list of paired devi‐
ces.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio".
4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.
5. "Options" Open.
6. "Configure phone"
7. "Audio"
8. "OK"
Connecting the device
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio".
4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.
White symbol : the device is active as an audio
source.
Playback
General information
▷ The display of music track information de‐
pends on the device.
▷ Operation can takes place on the device or
iDrive.
▷ Playback is interrupted when data is ex‐
changed via a mobile phone connected via
Bluetooth.
Starting playback
1.
Connect the device.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "External devices"
4. Select the symbol.
5. Select the desired track from the list, if nec‐
essary.
Seite 208
Entertainment CD/multimedia
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Playback menu
Depending on the particular device, some of the
functions may not be available.
Symbol Function
Next track
Fast forward: press and hold the
symbol.
Previous music track
Reverse: press and hold the symbol.
Track search
Music track search is possible depending on the
device.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Search device content"
5.
▷ "A-Z search"
▷ Select the desired entry or directory.
Playback mode
Depending on the device, different programs for
playing back music files might be available.
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Options" Open.
5. "Select player"
6. Select the desired channel.
Disconnecting the audio connection
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. Highlight the desired device.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Configure phone"
6. "Audio"
7. "OK"
Unpairing a device
1.
"CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio".
4. Highlight the device that is to be unpaired.
5. Open "Options".
6. "Remove phone from list"
What to do if...
Information on suitable devices can be found at
www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
Suitable mobile phones, refer to page 214.
The device is not supported by the vehicle.
▷ Perform a software update, refer to
page 210, if needed.
The device could not be paired or connected.
▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the device
and the vehicle match? Enter the same
passkey on the device and via iDrive.
▷ Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter
the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.
▷ Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
to the device or vehicle? Delete connections
with other devices if necessary.
▷ Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or
does it have only a limited remaining battery
life? Charge the mobile phone in the snap-
in adapter or via the charging cable.
Seite 209
CD/multimedia Entertainment
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi‐
ble that only one device can be connected
to the vehicle. Unpair the connected device
from the vehicle and pair and connect only
one device.
▷ The device no longer reacts? Switch the de‐
vice off and on again.
▷ Repeat the pairing procedure.
Music cannot be played back.
▷ Start the program for playing back music
data on the device and select a track on the
device if necessary.
▷ Switch the radio off and on again.
Music files can only be played back softly.
▷ Adjust the volume settings on the device.
Playback is disturbed when buttons are pressed
or by other messages on the device.
▷ Switch off the button tones and other signal
tones on the device.
Playback is interrupted by a telephone call or
traffic bulletin and is not resumed automatically.
▷ Switch the radio off and on again.
Playback is not possible if the mobile phone is
connected both via Bluetooth Audio and via the
extended connectivity of the music player in the
mobile phone.
▷ Disconnect one of the two connections; for
example, disconnect the audio connection,
refer to page 209, and restart playback.
If all points in this list have been checked and the
required function is still not available, contact
the hotline or service center.
Software Update
The vehicle supports various external devices
depending on the current software version. With
a software update, the vehicle can support new
cell phones or new external device, for example.
The updating of the software is done via:
▷ USB.
Updates and related current information is
available at www.bmw.com/update.
Displaying the current version
The currently installed software is displayed.
1. "Settings"
2. "Software update"
3. "Show current version"
SelectDesired version to displayAdditional in‐
formation.
Updating software via USB
The software may only be updated when the ve‐
hicle is stationary.
1.
Store the file for the software-update in the
main director of a USB flash drive.
2. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB in‐
terface of the USB audio interface in the
center armrest. An update via the USB in‐
terface in the glove compartment is not pos‐
sible.
3. "Settings"
4. "Software update"
5. "Update software"
6. "Start update"
7. "OK"
All listed software updates are installed.
Restoring the previous version
The software version before the last software
update can be restored.
Seite 210
Entertainment CD/multimedia
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
The previous version may only be restored when
the vehicle is stationary.
1. "Settings"
2. "Software update"
3. "Restore previous version"
4. "OK" Double-click.
All listed software updates are removed.
Note
While the software is being updated or a previ‐
ous version is being restored, BMW Assist, Of‐
fice functions and the connected devices are
temporarily unavailable. Wait several minutes
for the functions to become available again.
Seite 211
CD/multimedia Entertainment
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Communication
All of the options available to you for mobile
communication with family, friends, business
partners, and service providers are described in
this chapter.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Telephone
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
At a glance
The concept
Mobile phones or other external devices such as
audio players can be connected to the vehicle
via Bluetooth.
After these devices are paired once, they are
recognized automatically when the ignition is
switched on as soon as they are inside the ve‐
hicle and can be operated via iDrive, the buttons
on the steering wheel, and via voice activation.
Depending on their functionality, external devi‐
ces can be used via the vehicle as a telephone
or as an audio source. The telephone functions
are described in the following.
Up to four external devices can be paired.
Certain functions may need to be enabled by the
mobile phone provider or service provider.
Using the mobile phone while driving
Make entries only when traffic and road
conditions allow. Do not hold the mobile phone
in your hand while you are driving; use the
hands-free system instead. If you do not ob‐
serve this precaution, you can endanger the ve‐
hicle occupants and other road users.◀
Snap-in adapter
The snap-in adapter is used to:
▷ Hold the mobile phone.
▷ Recharge the battery.
▷ Connect the mobile phone to an outside an‐
tenna of the vehicle.
This provides for better network reception
and consistent sound quality.
Approved mobile phones
Details on which mobile phones and external
devices with a Bluetooth interface are sup‐
ported by the mobile phone preparation pack‐
age can be obtained at www.bmwusa.com/blue‐
tooth.
Displaying the vehicle identification
number and software part number
The vehicle identification number and software
part number are needed to determine which mo‐
bile phones are supported by the mobile phone
preparation package. The software version of
the mobile phone may also be required.
1.
"Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth® info"
4. "Display system information"
These approved mobile phones with a certain
software version, support the vehicle functions
described below.
Malfunctions may occur with other mobile
phones or software versions.
Do not operate a mobile phone that is connected
to the vehicle on the mobile phone keypad, as
this may lead to a malfunction.
A software update can be performed if neces‐
sary.
Notes
At high temperatures, the charge function of the
mobile phone can be limited where appropriate
and the functions are no longer executed.
Seite 214
Communication Telephone
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
When the mobile phone is used via the vehicle,
heed the operating manual of the mobile phone.
Pairing/unpairing the mobile
phone
General information
The following functions are available:
▷ Use of a mobile phone as a telephone.
▷ Use of a mobile phone as an additional tele‐
phone.
▷ Use of a mobile phone as an audio source.
▷ Use of an audio device as an audio source.
Requirements
▷ The mobile phone is suitable.
▷ The mobile phone is ready for operation.
▷ Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle and on
the mobile phone.
▷ Bluetooth presettings may need to be made
on the mobile phone, e.g., for a connection
without confirmation or visibility, refer to the
mobile phone operating instructions.
▷ Deactivate Bluetooth audio if necessary.
▷ A number with at least four and a maximum
of 16 digits was defined as the Bluetooth
passkey. It is only required once for pairing.
▷ The ignition is switched on.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth
Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply
with all safety guidelines and regulations.
1.
"Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth®"
Additional functions
Activating/deactivating the additional
functions
Activate the functions before pairing to be able
to use them in the vehicle. Information on suit‐
able mobile phones that support these func‐
tions, refer to page 214.
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Configure Bluetooth®"
5. Select the desired additional function.
▷ "Additional telephone"
▷ "Office"
▷ "Bluetooth® audio"
6. "OK"
As long as an additional function is deactivated,
it cannot be assigned to a telephone.
Additional telephone
A mobile phone can be used as an additional
telephone.
The additional telephone can be used to accept
incoming calls, refer to page 218. While a call is
active on the additional telephone, incoming
calls are displayed on the Control Display.
Audio source
A mobile phone can be used as an audio source.
Seite 215
Telephone Communication
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Pairing and connecting
Pairing the mobile phone
To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi‐
cle's occupants and to other road users, only
pair the mobile phone while the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.◀
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
played.
4. To perform additional steps on the mobile
phone, refer to the mobile phone operating
instructions: e.g. search for or connect the
Bluetooth device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile phone display.
5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the mobile phone display.
6. You are prompted by the iDrive or mobile
phone to enter the same Bluetooth passkey.
Enter the passkey and confirm.
Or
Compare the control number in the display
of the vehicle to the control number in the
display of the mobile phone. Confirm the
control number in the mobile phone and in
the vehicle.
"OK"
7. Select the functions for which the mobile
phone is to be used.
8. "OK"
If the pairing was successful, the mobile phone
appears at the top of the list of mobile phones.
The functions supported by the mobile phone
and audio device are displayed as symbols when
paired.
White symbol: the function is active.
Gray symbol: the function is inactive.
Symbol Function
Telephone.
Additional telephone.
Audio source.
Four mobile phones can be paired with the ve‐
hicle at once. Up to three mobile phones can be
connected with the vehicle at once.
If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., refer
to page 217.
Following the initial pairing
▷ The mobile phone is detected/connected in
the vehicle within a short period of time
when the engine is running or the ignition is
switched on.
▷ The phone book entries of the telephone
stored on the SIM card or mobile phone are
transmitted to the vehicle after detection,
depending on the mobile phone.
▷ Four mobile phones can be paired.
▷ Specific settings may be necessary in some
mobile phones, e.g., authorization or a se‐
cure connection; refer to the mobile phone
operating instructions.
Connecting a particular mobile phone
If more than one mobile phone is detected by the
vehicle, the mobile phone at the top of the list is
connected. If a different detected cell phone is
connected with the vehicle. A different mobile
phone can be connected by selecting it.
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. Select the mobile phone that is to be con‐
nected.
The functions assigned to the mobile phone be‐
fore unpairing are assigned to the mobile phone
when it is reconnected. If the mobile phone is
already connected, these functions are deacti‐
vated.
Seite 216
Communication Telephone
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Configuring cell phone
Additional functions can be activated or deacti‐
vated for paired and connected mobile phones.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. Highlight the mobile phone to be config‐
ured.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Configure phone"
6. At least one function must be selected.
▷ "Telephone"
▷ "Additional telephone"
▷ "Audio"
7. "OK"
If a function is assigned to a mobile phone, the
function will be deactivated where appropriate
for a mobile phone that is already connected and
the mobile phone will be unpaired.
Swapping the telephone and additional
telephone
The function of the telephone and additional tel‐
ephone can be swapped automatically.
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. "Swap phone/addit. phone"
Unpairing the mobile phone
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. Highlight the mobile phone that is to be un‐
paired.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Remove phone from list"
What to do if...
Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to
page 214.
The mobile phone could not be paired or con‐
nected.
▷ Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and on
the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in the
vehicle and on the mobile phone.
▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and the vehicle match? Enter the
same passkey on the mobile phone and via
iDrive.
▷ Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter
the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.
▷ Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
to the mobile phone or vehicle? Delete con‐
nections with other devices if necessary.
▷ Is the audio connection activated? Deacti‐
vate the audio connection.
▷ Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or
does it have only a limited remaining battery
life? Charge the mobile phone in the snap-
in adapter or via the charging cable.
▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi‐
ble that only one cell phone can be con‐
nected to the vehicle. Unpair the connected
cell phone from the vehicle and pair and con‐
nect only one cell phone.
The mobile phone no longer reacts.
▷ Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
▷ Ambient temperatures too high or too low?
Do not subject the mobile phone to extreme
ambient temperatures.
The telephone functions are not available.
▷ Is the mobile phone paired as an additional
telephone and is the additional telephone
function deactivated? Activate the function.
▷ Is an outgoing call not possible? Connect
the mobile phone as a telephone.
No or not all phone book entries are displayed,
or they are incomplete.
▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
not yet complete.
▷ It is possible that only the phone book en‐
tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card are
transmitted.
Seite 217
Telephone Communication
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
▷ It may not be possible to display phone book
entries with special characters.
▷ The number of phone book entries being
stored is too high.
▷ Is the data volume of the contact too large,
e.g., due to stored information such as
notes? Reduce the data volume of the con‐
tact.
▷ Is the mobile phone connected as an audio
source? The mobile phone must be con‐
nected as a telephone.
▷ Is the mobile phone connected as an audio
source or additional telephone? The mobile
phone must be connected as a telephone.
The phone connection quality is poor.
▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the
mobile phone can be adjusted, depending
on the mobile phone.
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in
adapter or place it in the area of the center
console.
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and
loudspeakers separately.
If all points in this list have been checked and the
required function is still not available, contact
the hotline or service center.
Controls
Adjusting the volume
Turn the knob until the desired volume is se‐
lected. The setting is stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
The vehicle automatically adjusts the volume of
the microphone on the telephone and the vol‐
ume of the called party. Depending on the mo‐
bile phone, the volumes may need to be ad‐
justed. The settings can only be created during
a call and must be adjusted separately for each
telephone. The settings are deleted when the
telephone is unpaired.
1. "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. Select the desired setting: "Microphone" or
"Loudspeak."
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Incoming call
Receiving calls
If the number of the caller is stored in the phone
book and is transmitted by the network, the
name of the contact is displayed. Otherwise,
only the phone number is displayed.
If more than one phone number is assigned to a
contact, only the name of the contact is dis‐
played.
For calls on the additional telephone, the num‐
ber is only displayed if it is transmitted by the
network.
An incoming call to the additional telephone is
automatically rejected if there is an active call on
the other telephone.
Accepting a call
Via iDrive
"Accept"
Seite 218
Communication Telephone
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Via the button on the steering wheel
Press the button.
Via the instrument cluster
"Accept"
Rejecting a call
Via iDrive
"Reject"
Via the instrument cluster
"Reject"
Ending a call
Via iDrive
"End call"
Via the button on the steering wheel
Press the button.
Via the instrument cluster
"End call"
Entering a phone number
Dialing a number
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Dial number"
3. Select the digits individually.
4. Select the symbol.
The phone number can also be entered by voice.
Calls with multiple parties
General information
You can switch between calls or connect two
calls to a single conference call. These functions
must be supported by the mobile phone and
service provider.
Accepting a call while speaking to
another party
This function might have to be activated by the
service provider and the mobile phone must be
adjusted accordingly.
If a second call comes in during an ongoing call,
a call waiting signal sounds where appropriate.
"Accept"
The call is accepted and the existing call is put
on hold.
Establishing a second call
Establish an additional call during an active call.
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "Hold"
Seite 219
Telephone Communication
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
The existing call is put on hold.
4. Dial the new phone number or select it from
a list.
Switching between two calls, hold call
The active call is displayed in color.
The call on hold is displayed in gray.
"Swap calls"
The call on hold is resumed.
Establishing a conference call
Two calls can be connected to a single tele‐
phone conference call.
1.
Establish two calls.
2. "Conference call"
When terminating a conference call, both calls
are ended. If one call is terminated by another
party, the other call can be continued.
Switching the microphone to mute
When a call is active, the microphone can be
muted.
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "Microphone mute"
A microphone that has been switched to mute
is automatically reactivated:
▷ When a new connection is established.
▷ When switching between call parties.
DTMF suffix dialing
DTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining ac‐
cess to network services or for controlling devi‐
ces, e.g., to make a remote inquiry of an answer‐
ing machine. The DTMF code is needed for this
purpose.
1. "Telephone"
2. Select the contact from a list or "Dial
number".
3. "Keypad dialing"
4. Enter the DTMF code via iDrive.
Phone book
Displays
The phone book accesses the contacts and
shows all contacts for which a phone number
has been stored. The entries can be selected to
make a call.
1.
"Telephone"
2. "Phone book"
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts.
Seite 220
Communication Telephone
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Calling a contact
Symbol Meaning
Contact with one stored phone num‐
ber.
Contact with more than one stored
phone number.
Call not possible; mobile phone with‐
out reception or network, or Service
Request is active.
For contacts with one stored phone number: se‐
lect the required contact. The connection is es‐
tablished.
For contacts with more than one stored phone
number: select the required contact and the
phone number. The connection is established.
Editing a contact
Changing the entries in "Contacts". When a
contact is changed, the changes are not stored
on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is
stored in the vehicle.
1.
Highlight the contact.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Edit entry"
The contact can be edited.
Redialing
General information
The list of dialed numbers in the mobile phone
is transmitted to the vehicle depending on the
mobile phone. The 20 phone numbers dialed
last are displayed. The sorting order of the
phone numbers depends on the particular mo‐
bile phone.
Dialing the number via the instrument
cluster
This is possible when there is no active call.
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Select the desired phone number.
The connection is established.
Dialing a number via iDrive
1. "Telephone"
2. "Redial"
3. Select the desired entry and the phone num‐
ber if necessary.
The connection is established.
Deleting a single entry or all entries
The erasure of entries depends on the mobile
phone.
1.
Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or"Delete list"
Saving an entry in the contacts
1.
Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
4. Select the contact, if necessary.
5. Select the type of number: "Home",
"Business", "Mobile" or "Other"
6. Complete the entries if necessary.
7. "Store contact"
Received calls
Displaying calls
The 20 calls that were last received are dis‐
played.
1.
"Telephone"
Seite 221
Telephone Communication
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
2. "Received calls"
Calling a number from the list
Selecting an entry.
The connection is established.
Deleting a single entry or all entries
The erasure of entries depends on the mobile
phone.
1.
Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or"Delete list"
Saving an entry in the contacts
1.
Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
4. Select the contact, if necessary.
5. Select the type of number: "Home",
"Business", "Mobile" or "Other"
6. Complete the entries if necessary.
7. "Store contact"
Hands-free system
General information
Calls that are being made on the hands-free
system can be continued on the mobile phone
and vice versa.
From the mobile phone to the hands-
free system
Calls that were begun outside of the Bluetooth
range of the vehicle can be continued on the
hands-free system with the ignition switched
on.
Depending on the mobile phone, the system au‐
tomatically switches to the hands-free system.
If the system does not switch over automatically,
follow the instructions on the mobile phone dis‐
play; refer also to the mobile phone operating
instructions.
From the hands-free system to the
mobile phone
Calls that are made on the hands-free system
can in some cases be continued on the mobile
phone; this depends on the mobile phone.
Follow the instructions on the mobile phone dis‐
play; refer also to the mobile phone operating
instructions.
Voice operation
Vehicles equipped with the voice activation sys‐
tem: operation, refer to page 22.
Vehicles not equipped with the voice activation
system: depending on the equipment, the mo‐
bile phone can be voice operated as described
below.
The list of short commands in the Owner's
Manual does not apply to this type of voice op‐
eration.
The concept
▷ The mobile phone can be operated without
taking your hands from the steering wheel.
▷ In many cases, the entries are accompanied
by announcements or questions.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions for voice operation.
Seite 222
Communication Telephone
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Using voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1. Briefly press the button on the
steering wheel.
2. Say the command.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Briefly press the button on the steering
wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Possible commands
Having possible commands read aloud
Press the button. ›Help‹. Possible commands
are announced.
The digits from zero to nine are recognized. The
digits can be spoken separately or combined in
a sequence to accelerate the entry.
Using alternative commands
The system often recognizes a number of dif‐
ferent commands to run a function; for instance:
›Dial name‹ or ›Name‹
Example: dialing a phone number
1.
Briefly press the button on the
steering wheel.
2. ›Dial number‹
The system says: »Please say the number«
3. E.g., ›123 456 790‹
The system says: »123 456 790. Continue?
«
4. ›Dial‹
The system says: »Dialing number«
Calling
Dialing a phone number
1. ›Dial number‹
2. Say the phone number.
3. ›Dial‹
Correcting the phone number
The sequence of digits can be deleted after the
system has repeated the digits.
›Correct number‹
The command can be repeated as often as nec‐
essary.
Deleting a phone number
›Delete‹
All digits entered up to that point are deleted.
Redialing
›Redial‹
Voice phone book
Depending on how your vehicle is equipped, it
may be necessary to create your own voice
phone book.
The entries must be entered using voice activa‐
tion and are separate from the memory in the
mobile phone. Up to 50 entries can be set up.
Saving an entry
1.
›Save name‹
2. Say the name. Do not exceed the speaking
duration of approx. 2 seconds.
3. Say the phone number after being prompted
to do so by the system.
4. ›Save‹
Deleting an entry
1.
›Delete name‹
2. Say the name after being prompted to do so.
3. Confirm the query with ›Yes‹.
Seite 223
Telephone Communication
223
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Deleting all entries
1. ›Delete phonebook‹
The dialog for deleting the phone book is
opened.
2. Confirm the query with ›Yes‹.
3. Confirm the query again with ›Yes‹.
Reading and selecting entries
1. ›Read phonebook‹
The dialog for reading the phone book is
opened.
2. Say ›Dial number‹ when the desired entry is
read.
Selecting an entry
1.
›Dial name‹
2. Say the name after being prompted to do so.
3. Confirm the query with ›Yes‹.
Adjusting the volume
Turn the knob during an announcement.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Notes
Do not use the voice operation to initiate an
Emergency Request. In stressful situations, the
voice and vocal pitch can change. This can un‐
necessarily delay the establishment of a tele‐
phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 270, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the system. The language for the mobile
phone voice operation is preset and cannot
be changed in the Control Display.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Snap-in adapter
General information
Detailed information about snap-in adapters,
which support the functions of the mobile
phone, is available from the service center.
Notes
At high temperatures, the charge functions of
the mobile phone can be limited under certain
circumstances, and the functions are no longer
executed.
When the mobile phone is used via the vehicle,
heed the operating manual of the mobile phone.
Installation position
In the center armrest.
Inserting the snap-in adapter
1.
Press the button and remove the cover.
Seite 224
Communication Telephone
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
2. Insert the snap-in adapter in the direction of
the arrow, arrow 1, and press down, arrow 2,
until it engages.
Inserting the mobile phone
1.
Depending on the mobile phone, remove
the protective cap from the antenna con‐
nector and from the USB connection of the
mobile phone.
2. Slide the mobile phone with the buttons fac‐
ing up in the direction of the electrical con‐
nections, arrow 1, and push downward, ar‐
row 2 until it engages.
Removing the mobile phone
Press the button and remove the mobile phone.
Seite 225
Telephone Communication
225
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Office
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
At a glance
General information
Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text mes‐
sages, and e-mails from the mobile phone can
be displayed on the Control Display if the mobile
phone provides compatible support of these
functions and the necessary Bluetooth stand‐
ards.
Information about which mobile phones support
Office functions can be found at
www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. A limited number
of compatible mobile phones is available for Of‐
fice.
Contents are only displayed in full length when
the vehicle is stationary.
The mobile phone has read-access only.
Do not use Office while driving
To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu‐
pants and to other road users, never attempt to
use the controls or enter information unless traf‐
fic and road conditions allow this.◀
Requirements
▷ A suitable mobile phone is paired with the
vehicle and connected. In some mobile
phones, data access must be confirmed on
the mobile phone.
▷ The time, time zone, and date, refer to
page 79, are correctly set on the Control
Display and on the mobile phone to correctly
display appointments, for example.
▷ Office is activated, refer to page 215.
Updating
Data are updated every time the mobile phone
is connected to the vehicle. Appointment en‐
tries, tasks, notes and reminders can be updated
separately.
1. "Office"
2. "Current office", "Calendar", "Tasks",
"Notes" or "Reminders"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Update data"
Cell phone data are transmitted again to the
vehicle.
Office information
The number of unread messages and active
tasks as well as the upcoming appointments are
displayed.
1.
"Office"
2. "Current office"
3. Select the desired entry to display details.
Seite 226
Communication Office
226
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Contacts
Note
If equipped with full mobile phone preparation
package.
At a glance
Contacts can be created and edited. The con‐
tacts from the mobile phone are displayed as
well if this function is supported by the mobile
phone. Addresses can be adopted as destina‐
tions for navigation and the phone numbers can
be dialed.
Displaying contacts
General information
1.
"Office"
2. "Contacts"
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. De‐
pending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
search is offered, refer to page 21.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts:
Symbol Storage location
No symbol In the vehicle; the address has not
been checked as a destination.
In the vehicle; the address has
been checked as a destination.
Mobile phone.
Dialing phone numbers
1. Select the desired contact.
2. Select the phone number.
The connection is established.
Editing a contact
1. Select the desired contact.
2. "Edit contact"
3. Change the entries.
4. "Store contact in vehicle"
When a contact is edited, the changes are not
stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry
is stored in the vehicle.
Selecting the contact as a navigation
destination
1.
Select the desired contact.
2. Select the address.
When contacts from the mobile phone are
used, the address may need to be matched
to the navigation data contained in the vehi‐
cle. In this case:
Correct the address.
3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Checking the address as a destination
An address that is to be used for destination
guidance must match the navigation data con‐
Seite 227
Office Communication
227
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
tained in the vehicle. The address can be
checked for this purpose.
1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
address.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address if necessary.
If the address is corrected and stored, a copy of
it is stored in the vehicle. The address is not
changed on the mobile phone.
New contact
General information
A contact can have up to 8 phone numbers,
2 addresses, 3 e-mail addresses and one Inter‐
net address.
1.
"Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. "Options" Open.
4. "New contact"
5. The entry fields are still filled with the previ‐
ous entries: "Delete input fields"
6. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next
to the entry field.
7. Enter the text and assign the contact type.
8. In the navigation system: enter address.
Only addresses contained in the navigation
data in the vehicle can be entered. This en‐
sures that destination guidance is possible
for all addresses.
If necessary, "Accept address".
9. "Store contact in vehicle"
Contact types
Various contact types can be assigned to phone
numbers and addresses.
Symbol Meaning
Home phone number.
Business phone number.
Mobile phone number.
Other phone number.
Home address.
Business address.
Specifying the home address
A home address can be stored. It appears at the
top of the contact list.
1.
"Home"
2. Create a contact.
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
Selecting the sorting order of the
names
Names can be displayed in a different order.
1.
"Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
last name"
Depending on how the contacts were stored on
the mobile phone, the sorting order of the names
may differ from the selected sorting order.
Show contact pictures
Pictures stored with the contacts are stored in
the vehicle when the mobile phone is connected
to the vehicle. The number of transmitted pic‐
Seite 228
Communication Office
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
tures depends on the mobile phone. The mobile
phone must support this function.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. "Options"
4. "Configure Bluetooth®"
5. "Show images"
Display of all contact pictures is activated or de‐
activated.
Exporting/importing contacts
Contacts can be exported and imported via the
Personal Profile, refer to page 31. The contacts
stored in the vehicle are exported, but not those
from the mobile phone.
Deleting contacts
Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are
deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone can‐
not be deleted.
1.
"Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Highlight the contact.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete contact"or "Delete all contacts".
6. If necessary "Yes"
Messages
General information
Whether or not text messages and e-mails from
the mobile phone are displayed depends on
whether transmission from the mobile phone to
the vehicle is supported. Text messages and e-
mails may not be supported by the service pro‐
vider, or the function may need to be enabled
separately. After the mobile phone is first paired,
transmission may take several minutes. Mes‐
sages are only displayed in full length when the
vehicle is stationary. Messages from the addi‐
tional telephone are not transmitted.
Displaying messages
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
A symbol identifies the type of message.
Symbol Message type
Text messages.
My Info
Message from the Concierge serv‐
ice.
E-mail from mobile phone.
Filtering the message list
The message list can be filtered when more than
one type of message exists.
1.
"Filter:"
2. Select the type of message.
▷ "All"
All messages are displayed.
▷ "E-mail"
Only e-mails from the mobile phone are
displayed.
▷ "Service message"
Only messages from the BMW Assist
Concierge service and My Info are dis‐
played.
▷ "Text message"
Only text messages from the mobile
phone are displayed.
Seite 229
Office Communication
229
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Deleting messages
Messages from the Concierge service and
My Info can be deleted.
Delete a message:
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
3. Select the desired message.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete message"
Delete all messages:
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete all messages" or"Delete service
messages"
Text messages
Calling the sender of a text message
1.
Select the desired message.
2. Select the symbol.
Saving the sender in the contacts
1.
Highlight the desired message.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails and notes can be saved or
selected, refer to page 233.
Reading the text message out loud
Read the text message out loud, refer to
page 233.
My Info
Selecting additional functions
Additional functions are available when a mes‐
sage is selected:
Symbol Function
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
"Call"
If the message contains a number,
the connection is established.
"Select phone number"
If the message contains more than
one number, select the desired num‐
ber from the list. The connection is
established.
Message from the Concierge service
Storing an address
1.
Select the desired message.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
Selecting additional functions
Additional functions are available when a mes‐
sage is selected:
Symbol Function
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
"Call"
If the message contains a number,
the connection is established.
Seite 230
Communication Office
230
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Symbol Function
"Select phone number"
If the message contains more than
one number, select the desired num‐
ber from the list. The connection is
established.
"Further information"
Displaying additional information.
E-mail
Displaying e-mails
1.
"Office"
2. "Messages"
3. Select the desired e-mail.
Displaying e-mail contacts
If the sender and recipient of an e-mail are trans‐
mitted by the mobile phone, this information is
displayed in the e-mail.
"Sender/Recipient"
If the e-mail addresses are stored in the con‐
tacts, the contact is displayed. Select the con‐
tact to display details.
If the e-mail addresses are not stored in the con‐
tacts, only the e-mail address is displayed.
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails and notes can be saved or
selected, refer to page 233.
Deactivating the full display
When an e-mail is opened in the vehicle, the e-
mail is fully transmitted to the vehicle. This may
result in charges.
1.
"Office"
2. "Messages"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Fully download e-mails"
Only a part of the e-mail from the cell phone
is loaded into the vehicle.
Reading the e-mail out loud
Read the e-mail out loud, refer to page 233.
Calendar
Display the calendar
Appointments during the last 20 and the next 50
days can be displayed.
1.
"Office"
2. "Calendar"
The appointments on the current day are
displayed.
Selecting the calendar day
1.
Select the date.
2. Select the desired day or date.
▷ "Next day"
▷ "Date:"
▷ "Previous day"
▷ "Today"
Display the appointment
1.
Select the desired appointment.
2. Scroll through the appointment if neces‐
sary:
▷ Turn the controller.
▷ Select the symbol.
Seite 231
Office Communication
231
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails and notes can be saved or
selected, refer to page 233.
Reading the appointment out loud
Read the appointment out loud, refer to
page 233.
Tasks
Displaying the task list
Display tasks that are due within the next
90 days.
1.
"Office"
2. "Tasks"
Sorting the task list
1.
Select the header in the task list.
2. Select the sorting criterion:
▷ "Priority (!)"
▷ "Subject"
▷ "Due date"
Displaying the task
1.
Select the desired task.
2. Scroll in the task if necessary:
▷ Turn the controller.
▷ Select the symbol.
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails and notes can be saved or
selected, refer to page 233.
Reading the task out loud
Read the task out loud, refer to page 233.
Notes
Displaying notes
1.
"Office"
2. "Notes"
All notes are displayed.
Displaying the note
1.
Select the desired note.
2. Scroll in the note if necessary:
▷ Turn the controller.
▷ Select the symbol
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails and notes can be saved or
selected, refer to page 233.
Reading the note out loud
Read the note out loud, refer to page 233.
Seite 232
Communication Office
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Reminders
Displaying reminders
Reminders of pending appointments and tasks
are displayed. After an appointment or after a
task is due, the reminder is no longer displayed.
1. "Office"
2. "Reminders"
3. Select the desired reminder.
The corresponding appointment or the task are
displayed.
Using contact data
At a glance
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, emails and notes can be stored or
selected.
Displaying contact or selecting phone
number
1.
"Use contact data"
2. Display the contact or select the phone
number:
▷ Select the contact to display contact de‐
tails.
▷ Select the phone number to establish a
connection directly.
Storing contact data
1.
"Use contact data"
2. Highlight the phone number or e-mail ad‐
dress.
3. "Options" Open.
4. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new
contact"
Reading out loud
Text messages, e-mails, appointment entries,
tasks, and notes can be read out loud.
1. Select the desired message, appointment,
task, or note.
2. Select the symbol.
The following options are available during read‐
ing:
▷ "Pause"
Interrupt reading. Select again to restart
reading.
▷ "Back to beginning"
Start reading message again from the be‐
ginning.
▷ Select the symbol.
Skip a paragraph.
▷ Select the symbol.
Go back one paragraph.
▷ To end reading, tilt the controller to the left.
What to do if...
Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to
page 214.
Appointments, tasks, notes, text messages, or
e-mails from the mobile phone are not dis‐
played.
▷ The mobile phone is not capable of the
missing function or is not connected cor‐
rectly.
▷ The Office function is deactivated.
▷ The mobile phone is connected as an addi‐
tional phone.
▷ Appointments are older than 20 days or are
more than 50 days in the future.
▷ The tasks have been marked as completed
or have a due date that lies more than
90 days in the future.
Seite 233
Office Communication
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
▷ Depending on the number of stored ap‐
pointments, task notes, and messages in
the mobile phone, not all are displayed in the
vehicle.
Not all appointments and tasks from the mobile
phone are displayed at the right time?
▷ The time zone, time or date is incorrectly set
on the Control Display and mobile phone.
The e-mail attachment is not displayed.
▷ E-mails are transmitted without an attach‐
ment.
Entries are not displayed in full length.
▷ Text were already transmitted from the mo‐
bile phone in a shortened form.
▷ Synchronization between the mobile phone
and vehicle may take several minutes.
The contact pictures are not being displayed?
▷ Up to 200 contact pictures can be stored in
the vehicle.
The E-mail is displayed with a delay?
▷ Check the e-mail settings on the mobile
phone and adjust if necessary.
If all points in this list have been checked and the
required function is still not available, contact
the hotline or service center.
Seite 234
Communication Office
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Contacts
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Note
If not equipped with mobile phone complete
preparation package.
General information
Contacts can be created and edited and the ad‐
dresses can be adopted as destinations for nav‐
igation.
New contact
1.
"Contacts"
2. "New contact"
3. The entry fields are still filled with the previ‐
ous entries: "Delete input fields"
4. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next
to the entry field.
5. Enter the text, refer to page 21.
6. If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation
system: Enter the address. Only addresses
contained in the navigation data in the vehi‐
cle can be entered. This ensures that desti‐
nation guidance is possible for all ad‐
dresses.
7. If necessary, "Store".
8. "Store contact in vehicle"
Specifying the home address
A home address can be stored. It appears at the
top of the contact list.
1.
"Home"
2. Create a contact.
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
My contacts
General information
List of all contacts stored in the vehicle.
Displaying contacts
1.
"Contacts"
Seite 235
Contacts Communication
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
2. "My contacts"
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. De‐
pending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
search is offered, refer to page 21.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts:
Symbol Storage location
No symbol In the vehicle; the address has not
been checked as a destination.
In the vehicle; the address has
been checked as a destination.
Editing a contact
1.
Select the desired contact.
2. "Edit contact"
3. Change the entries.
4. Move the controller to the left.
5. "Yes"
Selecting the contact as a navigation
destination
1.
Select the desired contact.
2. Select the address.
3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Checking the address as a destination
An address that is to be used for destination
guidance must match the navigation data con‐
tained in the vehicle. The address can be
checked for this purpose.
1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
address.
2. "Options" Open.
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address if necessary.
Selecting the sorting order of the
names
Names can be displayed in a different order.
1.
"My contacts"
2. "Options" Open.
3. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
last name"
Exporting/importing contacts
Contacts can be exported and imported via the
Personal Profile, refer to page 31.
Deleting contacts
1.
"My contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
3. "Options" Open.
4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts"
Seite 236
Communication Contacts
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
ConnectedDrive
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
BMW Assist
General information
BMW Assist provides you with certain services,
e.g., transmission of the position data of your
vehicle to the BMW Assist Response Center if
an Emergency Request has been initiated.
Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi‐
vidually agreed upon contract.
After your contract has expired, the BMW Assist
system will be deactivated by the BMW Assist
Response Center without your having to visit a
service center. After the BMW Assist system
has been deactivated, no BMW Assist services
will be available. The BMW Assist system can be
reactivated by a service center after you sign a
new contract.
Requirements
▷ The installed BMW Assist system is logged
in to a wireless communications network.
This network must be capable of transmit‐
ting the services.
▷ To transmit position data, the vehicle must
be able to determine the current position.
▷ The BMW Assist service contract was
signed with your service center or with the
BMW Assist Response Center. Enabling
must have been completed.
▷ BMW Assist is activated.
Services offered
▷ Emergency Request: when you press the
SOS button, a connection to the BMW As‐
sist Response Center is established. The
BMW Assist Response Center then speaks
with you and takes further steps to help you.
▷ Automatic Collision Notification: under cer‐
tain conditions, a connection is established
to the BMW Assist Response Center after a
serious accident. If possible, the BMW As‐
sist Response Center then speaks with you
and takes further steps to help you.
▷ Enhanced Roadside Assistance: BMW
Roadside Assistance can be contacted if as‐
sistance is needed in the event of a break‐
down. If possible, the vehicle and position
data are transmitted in the process.
▷ Customer Relations: connection with Cus‐
tomer Relations for information on all as‐
pects of your vehicle.
▷ TeleService: data on your vehicle's service
status or required inspections are transmit‐
ted to your service center, either automati‐
cally before a service due date or when you
request a BMW service appointment.
▷ Remote Door Unlock: the BMW Assist Re‐
sponse Center provides assistance if, for ex‐
ample, the remote control is not available
and the vehicle needs to be opened.
▷ Stolen Vehicle Recovery: after you report
that your vehicle was stolen to the police, the
BMW Assist Response Center can deter‐
mine its position.
▷ In addition to these services, the optional
Convenience Plan offers Concierge service
and information for route planning, traffic,
and weather. A limited number of calls can
be made via the BMW Assist Response
Center with Critical Calling if, for example,
the mobile phone is not available or dis‐
charged.
Seite 237
ConnectedDrive Communication
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Press the SOS button to contact the BMW
Assist Response Center.
TeleService
General information
TeleService supports communication with your
service center.
▷ Data on the vehicle's service requirements
can be sent directly to the service center. In
this way, the service center can plan its work
in advance. This shortens the duration of the
service appointment.
▷ In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve‐
hicle's condition can be sent directly to
Roadside Assistance.
▷ The service varies by country.
▷ Connection costs may ensue.
▷ Services may be restricted abroad.
Requirements
▷ BMW Assist is activated.
▷ Wireless reception is available.
▷ The ignition is switched on.
Use of TeleService
The TeleServices are typically activated in the
vehicle.
Even if TeleService Customer Service is not ac‐
tive, a voice contact to Roadside Assistance is
still possible.
To continue using or to deactivate the services,
please contact your service partner or the BMW
customer hotline.
Concierge service
General information
The BMW Assist Concierge service offers infor‐
mation on events, gas stations or hotels, and
provides phone numbers and addresses. Hotels
can be booked directly by the BMW Assist Con‐
cierge service. The Concierge service is part of
the optional BMW Convenience Plan.
Starting the Concierge service
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Concierge"
3. "Start service"
A voice connection is established with the BMW
Assist Concierge service. Phone numbers and
addresses can be transmitted to the vehicle.
Roadside Assistance
At a glance
BMW Roadside Assistance can be contacted if
assistance is needed in the event of a break‐
down.
Roadside Assistance can also be contacted via
a Check Control message, refer to page 73.
Start Roadside Assistance without
BMW Assist or TeleServices
1.
"BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Roadside Assistance"
The Roadside Assistance number is dis‐
played. If the mobile phone is paired, a con‐
Seite 238
Communication ConnectedDrive
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
nection is established to Roadside Assis‐
tance.
Start Roadside Assistance with BMW
Assist or TeleServices
General information
If the vehicle is equipped with TeleServices,
support is first offered through TeleService Di‐
agnosis and, where applicable, then through
TeleService Help.
1.
"BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Roadside Assistance"
3. "Start service"
TeleService Diagnosis
TeleService Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that are
important for vehicle diagnosis. These data are
transmitted automatically.
After the data are transmitted, the voice con‐
nection to Roadside Assistance is reestab‐
lished.
BMW Search
At a glance
A business search can be opened via BMW
Search.
License conditions
This product contains NetFront Browser soft‐
ware of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007
ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
NetFront is a trademark or registered trademark
of ACCESS CO., LTD., in Japan and other coun‐
tries.
This software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
Requirements
▷ Subscription to the optional Convenience
Plan.
▷ The date setting, refer to page 80, on the
Control Display is current.
▷ The vehicle is located within wireless net‐
work coverage.
Starting BMW Search
1.
"BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW Online"
3. If necessary, "OK".
The BMW Search home page is displayed.
Operating BMW Search
To start a search:
▷ Turn the controller to highlight an element.
▷ Press the controller to display an element.
Seite 239
ConnectedDrive Communication
239
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Opening the start page
1. "Options" Open.
2. "Display start page"
Loading a new page
1.
"Options" Open.
2. "Update"
Cancel
1.
"Options" Open.
2. "Cancel loading"
Customer Relations
At a glance
Contact Customer Relations for information on
all aspects of your vehicle.
Calling Customer Relations
Vehicles not equipped with BMW
Assist or TeleService
1.
"BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Customer Relations"
The Customer Relations phone number is dis‐
played. If the mobile phone is paired, a connec‐
tion is established to Customer Relations.
Service Request
At a glance
Sends information to your service partner to re‐
quest the arrangement of a service appoint‐
ment. The TeleService data is transmitted dur‐
ing a Service Request. If possible, your service
partner will establish contact with you.
Starting a Service Request
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Service Request"
3. "Start service"
A Service Request can be started via a Check
Control message, refer to page 73.
Automatic Service Request
The TeleService data necessary for servicing
the vehicle are automatically sent to your service
partner prior to the service deadline. If possible,
the service partner will contact you and a service
appointment can be arranged.
Seite 240
Communication ConnectedDrive
240
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
To check when your service partner was noti‐
fied:
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
TeleService Report
Transmits technical data that is evaluated for the
ongoing development of BMW products from
your vehicle to BMW in regular intervals if nec‐
essary.
TeleService Report is activated in vehicles that
meet certain technical requirements and have a
valid Assist contract; this feature is free of
charge.
Neither personal data nor position data is trans‐
mitted.
Indicate when the last TeleService Report was
transmitted:
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Teleservice Info"
Services status
Displaying available services
Display of all services available in the vehicle.
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Service Status"
3. "Available services"
Updating BMW Assist
Manual update of all services available in the ve‐
hicle.
"Update BMW Assist"
Data transfer
During the updating of BMW services, display
the status of the data transfer.
1.
"BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Options" Open.
3. "Data transfer"
Apps
At a glance
Certain software applications of a suitable cell
phone can be integrated in the vehicle. These
Seite 241
ConnectedDrive Communication
241
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
software applications are displayed on the Con‐
trol Display.
Operation can be performed via iDrive.
Requirements
▷ The mobile phone is suitable.
▷ The cell phone operating system supports
the software applications of Apps.
▷ Software applications are installed on the
cell phone and ready to use.
▷ Corresponding mobile wireless contract.
Any additionally incurred costs are not a part
of Apps.
▷ Use only BMW approved software applica‐
tions; otherwise, it may result in malfunc‐
tions.
Information about suitable cell phones, available
software applications and their installation can
be found at www.bmw.com/connectivity or at
the service center.
Create the entries.
Make entries only when traffic and road
conditions allow. Otherwise, the vehicle occu‐
pants and other road users may be put in danger
because of the distraction from driving.
For reasons of safety, some software applica‐
tions are usable only while the vehicle is station‐
ary.◀
Use apps
1.
Connect the cell phone via the snap-in
adapter or via the USB audio interface.
2. "ConnectedDrive"
3. Select the desired software application.
Displaying status
Information about the currently available soft‐
ware applications can be displayed.
1.
"ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW apps"
PlugIn
Selected functions of the cell phone are dis‐
played on the Control Display. Operation can be
performed via iDrive.
1. Connect cell phone via the snap-in adapter.
2. "ConnectedDrive"
3. "PlugIn"
4. "Activate PlugIn"
5. Navigate to the displayed functions via the
controller and select, for example, a desired
category or track.
Press button to switch within the cell
phone functions to a higher level or back.
Press button twice to switch back to the
main menu.
Notes
▷ The ranges of Apps that can be displayed on
the Control Display depend on the range of
installed software applications on the cell
phone.
▷ The data transmission of the software ap‐
plications from the cell phone to the vehicle
can last some time. Some software applica‐
tions depend on the speed of the available
Internet connection of the cell phone.
▷ Some cell phones cannot simultaneously
use Apps and the Bluetooth hands-free sys‐
tem.
If necessary, restart the software application
on the cell phone after a phone conversa‐
tion.
Seite 242
Communication ConnectedDrive
242
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Seite 243
ConnectedDrive Communication
243
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Mobility
To ensure that you remain mobile at all times, this
chapter supplies you with important information
on the topics of fuels and lubricants, wheels and
tires, service, maintenance, and Roadside
Assistance.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Refueling
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
General information
Refuel promptly
Refuel no later than at a range of
30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine is not
ensured and damage may occur.◀
Fuel cap
Opening
1.
Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Closing
1.
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Do not pinch the retaining strap
Do not pinch the retaining strap attached
to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed
properly and fuel vapors can escape.
A message is displayed if the cap is loose or
missing.◀
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
In the event of an electrical malfunction, for ex‐
ample.
Seite 246
Mobility Refueling
246
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
1. Remove cover.
2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump sym‐
bol. This releases the fuel filler flap.
Observe the following when
refueling
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Do not overfill the fuel tank
Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise fuel
may escape, causing harm to the environment
and damaging the vehicle.◀
Handling fuels
Obey safety regulations posted at the gas
station.◀
Seite 247
Refueling Mobility
247
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Fuel
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Fuel quality
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used.
Refuel only with unleaded gasoline with‐
out metallic additives.
Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gaso‐
line with metallic additives, e. g. manganese or
iron, or permanent damage to the catalytic con‐
verter and other components.◀
Do not refuel with ethanol
Do not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an
ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, as this
would damage the engine and fuel supply sys‐
tem.◀
Required fuel
Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91 or AKI
89
BMW recommends AKI 91 or 89.
Gasoline with lower AKI
The minimum AKI Rating is 89.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Minimum fuel grade
Do not use any gasoline below the mini‐
mum fuel grade as this may impair engine per‐
formance.◀
Use high-quality brands
Field experience has indicated significant differ‐
ences in fuel quality: volatility, composition, ad‐
ditives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale in
the United States and Canada.
Fuels containing up to and including 10 % etha‐
nol or other oxygenates with up to 2.8 % oxygen
by weight, that is, 15 % MTBE or 3 % methanol
plus an equivalent amount of co-solvent, will not
void the applicable warranties with respect to
defects in materials or workmanship.
Minimum fuel grade
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
driveability, starting and stalling problems es‐
pecially under certain environmental conditions
such as high ambient temperature and high al‐
titude.
Should you encounter driveability problems
which you suspect could be related to the fuel
you are using, we recommend that you respond
by switching to a recognized high-quality brand
such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier
Detergent Gasoline.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in unscheduled maintenance.◀
Seite 248
Mobility Fuel
248
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Wheels and tires
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Tire inflation pressure
Safety information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐
sure influence the following:
▷ The service life of the tires.
▷ Road safety.
▷ Driving comfort.
Checking the pressure
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after driving no more
than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours. When the tires
are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure
and correct it as needed: at least twice a month
and before a long trip. If you fail to observe this
precaution, you may be driving on tires with in‐
correct tire pressures, a condition that may not
only compromise your vehicle's driving stability,
but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an
accident.◀
After correcting the tire inflation pressure:
▷ Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
▷ Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Pressure specifications
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 250, contains all pressure specifications
for the specified tire sizes at the ambient tem‐
perature. Pressure specifications apply to ap‐
proved tire sizes and recommended tire brands.
This information can be obtained from your
service center.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/
160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure val‐
ues in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 250, and adjust as necessary.
These pressure values can also be found on the
tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door
pillar.
Maximum permissible speed
Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other‐
wise, tire damage and accidents may result.◀
Seite 249
Wheels and tires Mobility
249
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Tire inflation pressure values up to
100 mph/160 km/h
640i Gran Coupe
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
245/40 R 19 98 V
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL RSC
2.3 / 33 2.5 / 36
Front: 245/45 R 18
96 Y RSC
Rear:
275/40 R 18 99 Y
RSC
2.3 / 33
-
-
2.3 / 33
Front: 245/40 R 19
94 Y RSC
Rear:
275/35 R 19 96 Y
RSC
2.3 / 33
-
-
2.5 / 36
Front: 245/35 R 20
95 Y XL RSC
Rear:
275/30 R 20 97 Y
XL RSC
2.5 / 36
-
-
2.8 / 41
Compact wheel:
T 135/90 R 17 104
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds
above 100 mph/160 km/h
Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in ex‐
cess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and,
if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds
exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant
table on the following pages. Otherwise tire
damage and accidents could occur.◀
Tire inflation pressure values over
100 mph/160 km/h
640i Gran Coupe
Without high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
245/40 R 19 98 V
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL RSC
2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41
Front: 245/45 R 18
96 Y RSC
Rear:
275/40 R 18 99 Y
RSC
2.3 / 33
-
-
2.3 / 33
Front: 245/40 R 19
94 Y RSC
Rear:
275/35 R 19 96 Y
RSC
2.3 / 33
-
-
2.5 / 36
Seite 250
Mobility Wheels and tires
250
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
M+S XL A/S RSC
M+S XL A/S RSC
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Front: 245/35 R 20
95 Y XL RSC
Rear:
275/30 R 20 97 Y
XL RSC
2.5 / 36
-
-
2.8 / 41
Compact wheel:
T 135/90 R 17 104
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
With high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL RSC
2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45
Front: 245/45 R 18
96 Y RSC
Rear:
275/40 R 18 99 Y
RSC
2.6 / 38
-
-
2.6 / 38
Front: 245/40 R 19
94 Y RSC
Rear:
275/35 R 19 96 Y
RSC
2.6 / 38
-
-
2.9 /42
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Front: 245/35 R 20
95 Y XL RSC
Rear:
275/30 R 20 97 Y
XL RSC
2.8 / 41
-
-
3.1 / 45
Compact wheel:
T 135/90 R 17 104
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Tire identification marks
Tire size
255/50 R 19 103 Y
255: nominal width in mm
50: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
19: rim diameter in inches
103: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Speed letter
T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 3510
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
3510: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
Seite 251
Wheels and tires Mobility
251
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Tire age
DOT … 3510: the tire was manufactured in the
35th week in 2010.
Recommendation
Regardless of wear, replace tires at least every
6 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA;
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal
Safety Requirements in addition to these
grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as
well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due
to variations in driving habits, service practices
and differences in road characteristics and cli‐
mate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfa‐
ces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering, hydro‐
planing, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus‐
tained high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Temperature grade for this tire
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and pos‐
sible tire failure.
If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀
RSC – Run-flat tires
Run-flat tires, refer to page 255, are labeled with
a circular symbol containing the letters RSC
marked on the sidewall.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
weather performance than summer tires.
Seite 252
Mobility Wheels and tires
252
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.12 in/3 mm.
There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if
the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.16 in/4 mm.
Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are
less suitable for winter operation.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's
circumference and have the legally required
minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.
They are marked on the side of the tire with TWI,
Tread Wear Indicator.
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign ob‐
jects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Notes
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as
well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can
cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐
pension parts. This is more likely to occur with
low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning
between the wheel and the road. Be careful to
avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐
pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-pro‐
file tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐
fects:
▷ Unusual vibrations during driving.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong tendency
to pull to the left or right.
Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over
curbs, road damage, or similar things.
In case of tire damage
If there are indications of tire damage, re‐
duce your speed immediately and have the
wheels and tires checked right away; otherwise,
there is the increased risk of an accident.
Drive carefully to the next service center or tire
shop.
If necessary, have the vehicle towed.
Otherwise, tire damage can be life-threatening
for vehicle occupants and other traffic partici‐
pants.◀
Repair of tire damage
For safety reasons, the manufacturer of
your vehicle recommends that you do not have
damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐
placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐
sult.◀
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting
Information on mounting tires
Have mounting and balancing performed
only by a service center or tire specialist.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
Seite 253
Wheels and tires Mobility
253
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Wheel and tire combination
Information on the correct wheel-tire combina‐
tion and rim versions for your vehicle can be ob‐
tained from your service center.
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the
function of a variety of systems such as ABS or
DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible.
Approved wheels and tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐
mends that you use only wheels and tires that
have been approved for your particular vehicle
model.
For example, despite having the same official
size ratings, variations can lead to body contact
and with it, the risk of severe accidents.
The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot evalu‐
ate non-approved wheels and tires to determine
if they are suited for use, and therefore cannot
ensure the operating safety of the vehicle if they
are mounted.◀
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐
hicle recommends certain tire brands. These
can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.
With proper use, these tires meet the highest
standards for safety and handling.
New tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac‐
tion potential until after an initial breaking-in pe‐
riod.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Retreaded tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Retreaded tires
Possibly substantial variations in the de‐
sign and age of the tire casing structures can
limit service life and have a negative impact on
road safety.◀
Winter tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures
below +45 ℉/+7 ℃.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires do pro‐
vide better winter traction than summer tires,
they do not provide the same level of perform‐
ance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then display a corresponding sign in the field of
vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire spe‐
cialist or from your service center.
Maximum speed for winter tires
Do not exceed the maximum speed for the
winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and acci‐
dents can occur.◀
Run-flat tires
If you are already using run-flat tires, for your
own safety you should replace them only with
the same kind. No spare tire is available in the
Seite 254
Mobility Wheels and tires
254
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
case of a flat tire. Your service center will be glad
to advise you.
Rotating wheels between axles
The manufacturer of your vehicle advises
against swapping wheels between the front and
rear axles.
This can impair the handling characteristics.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Run-flat tires
Label
RSC label on the tire sidewall.
The wheels are composed of special rims and
tires that are self-supporting, to a limited de‐
gree.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re‐
main drivable to a restricted degree in the event
of a pressure loss.
Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to
page 95.
Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to
page 92.
Changing run-flat tires
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your
service center will be glad to advise you.
Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains
Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have
been tested by the manufacturer of your vehicle,
classified as road-safe and recommended.
Consult your service center for more informa‐
tion.
Use
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 225/55 R 17.
▷ 245/45 R 18.
▷ 245/40 R 19
Follow the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Make sure that the snow chains are always suf‐
ficiently tight. Retighten as needed according to
the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control if necessary.
Maximum speed with snow chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when
using snow chains.
Seite 255
Wheels and tires Mobility
255
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Snow chain detection
The concept
When using snow chains, you should set
whether you are driving with or without snow
chains via the iDrive.
The snow chain detection system supports you
by automatically showing the detected state on
the Control Display.
When snow chains are in use, the rear axle steer‐
ing of the Integral Active Steering is deactivated
automatically.
At speeds above the maximum permitted speed
with snow chains of 30 mph/50 km/h, the rear
axle steering is activated again automatically.
Activating the status
1.
"Settings"
2. "Tire chains"
3. "Tire chains installed"
Automatic detection
If functioning properly:
▷ Snow chains are mounted. The setting is not
activated .
After you drive a short distance, a Check
Control message is shown and the state is
activated automatically.
Confirm the automatic activation.
▷ Snow chains are not mounted. The setting
is activated .
At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, a Check
Control message is displayed. Deactivate
the status manually.
If not functioning properly:
▷ Snow chains are mounted. The setting is not
activated .
A Check Control message is not displayed.
The automatic detection system is malfunc‐
tioning. Activate the status manually.
Activating/deactivating rear axle
steering
If the status indicating that snow chains are in
use is activated, the rear axle steering is deacti‐
vated automatically.
At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, the rear axle
steering is activated again, even though snow
chains are in use.
Seite 256
Mobility Wheels and tires
256
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Engine compartment
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Vehicle identification number
2 Jump-starting, negative terminal
3 Washer fluid reservoir
4 Jump-starting, positive terminal
5 Oil filler neck.
6 Coolant reservoir
Hood
Opening the hood
Working in the engine compartment
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without the
necessary professional technical training.
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐
lines, have any work on the vehicle performed
only by a service center.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
Seite 257
Engine compartment Mobility
257
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Never reach into the engine compartment
Never reach into the intermediate spaces
or gaps in the engine compartment. Otherwise,
there is risk of injury, e.g. from rotating or hot
parts.◀
1. Pull the lever.
2. Press the release handle and open the hood.
3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.
Danger of injury when the hood is open
There is a danger of injury from protruding
parts when the hood is open.◀
Closing the hood
Let the hood drop from a height of approx.
16 in/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully.
The hood must audibly engage on both sides.
Hood open when driving
If you see any signs that the hood is not
completely closed while driving, pull over imme‐
diately and close it securely.◀
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Seite 258
Mobility Engine compartment
258
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Engine oil
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
General information
The engine oil consumption is dependent on the
driving style and driving conditions.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling.
For 640i Gran Coupé:
Checking the oil level
The concept
The oil level is monitored electronically during
driving and shown on the Control Display.
If the oil level reaches the minimum level, a
check control message is displayed.
Displaying the oil level
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
Possible messages
▷ "Engine oil level OK"
▷ "Engine oil at minimum. Add 1 quart of
engine oil!"
When the display appears in the instrument
cluster, add 1 US quart/liter of oil within the
next 125 miles/200 km.
▷ "Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1
quart!"
Immediately add 1 US quart/liter of oil.
Detailed measurement
Requirements:
▷ Vehicle is on a level road and the engine is
running at operating temperature.
▷ Automatic transmission: Selector lever in
transmission position N or P and gas pedal
not depressed.
In order to perform a detailed measurement of
the engine oil level:
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Measure engine oil level"
4. "Start measurement"
The oil level is checked and displayed via a scale.
During the detailed measurement, the idle
speed is increased somewhat.
Duration: approx. 1 minute.
Adding engine oil
Filler neck
When the indicator lights up in the instrument
cluster, add 1 US quart/liter of engine oil within
the next 125 miles/200 km.
Seite 259
Engine oil Mobility
259
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Protect children
Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐
dren and heed the warnings on the containers
to prevent health risks.◀
Oil types for refilling
Notes
No oil additives
Oil additives may lead to engine damage.◀
Viscosity grades for engine oils
When selecting an engine oil, ensure that
the engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity
grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40,
and SAE 5W-30 or malfunctions or engine dam‐
age may occur.◀
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the
engine.
Some types of oils in some cases are not avail‐
able in all countries.
Approved oil types
Specification
BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30
BMW Longlife-01
BMW Longlife-01 FE
Additional information about the approved
types of oils can be requested from the service
center.
Alternative oil types
If the approved engine oils are not available, up
to 1 US quart/liter of an oil with the following
specification can be added:
Specification
API SM or superior grade specification
Oil change
An oil change should be carried out by your
service center only.
Seite 260
Mobility Engine oil
260
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Coolant
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
General information
Danger of burns from hot engine
Do not open the cooling system while the
engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant may
cause burns.◀
Suitable additives
Only use suitable additives; otherwise, en‐
gine damage may occur. The additives are
harmful to your health.◀
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are suit‐
able for your vehicle. Ask your service center for
suitable additives.
Coolant level
Checking
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the cap of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
sure to dissipate, and then open it.
3. The coolant level is correct if it lies between
the minimum and maximum marks in the
filler neck.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level; do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
6. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmental
protection regulations when disposing
of coolant and coolant additives.
Seite 261
Coolant Mobility
261
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Maintenance
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
BMW Maintenance System
The maintenance system directs you to re‐
quired maintenance measures and thereby sup‐
ports you in maintaining road safety and the op‐
erational reliability of the vehicle.
Condition Based Service CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐
count the driving conditions of your vehicle.
Based on this, Condition Based Service deter‐
mines the maintenance requirements.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance you need to your user
profile.
Details on the service requirements, refer to
page 75, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is con‐
tinuously stored in the remote control. Your
service center will read out this data and suggest
the right array of service procedures for your ve‐
hicle.
Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐
mote control that you used most recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
If this occurs, have a service center update the
time-dependent maintenance procedures,
such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary,
changing the engine oil and the microfilter/acti‐
vated-charcoal filter.
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for
additional information on service requirements.
Maintenance and repair should be performed by
your service center. Make sure to have regular
maintenance procedures recorded in the vehi‐
cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models, and in the Warranty and Service
Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These en‐
tries are proof of regular maintenance.
Seite 262
Mobility Maintenance
262
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
checking the primary components in the vehicle
emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as pos‐
sible.
Canadian model: warning light indi‐
cates the engine symbol.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive misfir‐
ing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
tem checked immediately; otherwise, seri‐
ous engine misfiring within a brief period can
seriously damage emission control compo‐
nents, in particular the catalytic converter.
Fuel cap
The indicator lamp lights up.
If the fuel cap is not properly tightened,
the OBD system may conclude that fuel
vapor is escaping. If the cap is then tightened,
the display should go out in a short time.
Data memory
Your vehicle records data relating to vehicle op‐
eration, faults and user settings. These data are
stored in the remote control and can be read out
with suitable devices, particularly when the ve‐
hicle is serviced. The data obtained in this way
provide valuable information for service proc‐
esses and repair or for optimizing and develop‐
ing vehicle functions further.
In addition, if you signed a service contract for
BMW Assist, certain vehicle data can be sent
directly from the vehicle to facilitate the desired
services.
Seite 263
Maintenance Mobility
263
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Replacing components
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Onboard vehicle tool kit
The onboard vehicle tool kit is stored under the
cargo floor cover in the cargo area.
Wiper blade replacement
General information
Do not fold down the wipers without wiper
blades
Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have
not been installed; this may damage the wind‐
shield.◀
Replacing the wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer to
page 66, the wiper arms.
2. Fold up the wipers.
3. Position the wiper blade in a horizontal po‐
sition.
4. Remove the wiper blade toward one side.
Lamp and bulb replacement
General information
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution
to vehicle safety.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
the service center if you are unfamiliar with them
or they are not described here.
You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs
at the service center.
Seite 264
Mobility Replacing components
264
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Danger of burns
Only change bulbs when they are cool;
otherwise, there is the danger of getting
burned.◀
Working on the lighting system
When working on the lighting system, you
should always switch off the lights affected to
prevent short circuits.
To avoid possible injury or equipment damage
when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions
provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀
Do not perform work/bulb replacement on
xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system, in‐
cluding bulb replacement, performed only by a
service center. Due to the high voltage present
in the system, there is the danger of fatal injuries
if work is carried out improperly.◀
Do not touch the bulbs
Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare hands, as even minute amounts of
contamination will burn into the bulb's surface
and reduce its service life.
Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or
hold the bulb by its base.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover
serve as the light source for controls, display el‐
ements and other equipment.
These light-emitting diodes, which are related
to conventional lasers, are officially designated
as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers
Do not remove the covers, and never stare
into the unfiltered light for several hours; other‐
wise, irritation of the retina could result.◀
Headlamp glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lamps in cool or humid weather. When
driving with the light switched on, the conden‐
sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐
lamp glasses do not need to be changed.
If the headlamps do not dim despite driving with
the light switched on, increasing humidity forms,
e. g. water droplets in the light, have the service
center check this.
Front lamps, bulb replacement
Xenon headlamps
Because of the long life of these bulbs, the like‐
lihood of failure is very low. Switching the lamps
on and off frequently shortens their life.
Do not perform work/bulb replacement on
xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system, in‐
cluding bulb replacement, performed only by a
service center. Due to the high voltage present
in the system, there is the danger of fatal injuries
if work is carried out improperly.◀
Low beams and high beams are designed with
xenon technology.
For checking and adjusting headlamp aim,
please contact your BMW center.
LED headlamps, Light-emitting diodes
(LEDs) or light modules
With Xenon-headlamps, the following lamps are
designed with LED technology or as a light mod‐
ule:
▷ Parking lamps and roadside parking lamps
▷ Turn signal lamps
▷ Daytime running lights
With LED headlamps, all front lamps are de‐
signed with LED technology or as a light module.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Seite 265
Replacing components Mobility
265
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Follow the General instructions on lamps and
bulbs., refer to page 264
Turning lamp on the Xenon headlamp
Follow the General instructions on lamps and
bulbs., refer to page 264
The illustration shows the left side of the engine
compartment.
55-watt bulb, H3
1. Turn the cap and remove it.
2. Detach the wire bracket.
3. Disconnect the cable at the plug-in connec‐
tion and remove the bulb.
4. Insert the new bulb. Ensure that the bulb has
the correct orientation. Because of its
shape, the bulb can only be inserted in one
direction.
5. Secure the bulb with the wire bracket.
6. Connect the bulb.
7. Mount the cap.
Tail lamps, bulb replacement
At a glance
1 Turn signal/brake lamp
2 Reversing lamp
3 Inside brake lamp
4 Tail lamp
5 Outside brake lamp
6 Rear reflector
Turn signal, outer brake, tail, and
license plate lamps
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 264.
These lights feature LED technology.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Lamps in the trunk lid
Access to the lamps
If necessary, remove the fasteners using the
screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit
and fold away the cover.
Seite 266
Mobility Replacing components
266
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Inside brake lamp
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 264.
24-watt bulb, HP24W
1. Squeeze the bulb holder and pull it out.
2. Pull off the connector.
3. Replace the bulb.
4. Mount the bulb holder and the cover of the
trunk lid in reverse order.
Reversing lamp
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 264.
16-watt bulb, W16W
1.
Unscrew the bulb holder counterclockwise.
2. Pull out the bulb and replace it.
3. Mount the bulb holder and the cover of the
trunk lid in reverse order.
Changing wheels
Notes
The vehicle equipment does not include a spare
tire.
When using run-flat tires or tire sealants, a tire
does not need to be changed immediately in the
event of pressure loss due to a flat tire.
The tools for changing wheels are available as
accessories from your service center.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated at the positions shown.
Lug bolt lock
The lug bolt lock is in the onboard vehicle tool
kit or in a storage compartment close to the on‐
board vehicle tool kit, refer to page 264.
▷ Lug bolt, arrow 1.
▷ Adapter, arrow 2.
Removing
1.
Attach the adapter to the wheel lug.
Seite 267
Replacing components Mobility
267
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
2. Unscrew the lug bolt.
Remove the adapter after screwing the lug bolt
back on.
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec‐
trolyte will last for the life of the battery.
Your service center will be glad to advise you on
questions regarding the battery.
Battery replacement
Use approved vehicle batteries only
Only use vehicle batteries that have been
approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer;
otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and
systems or functions may not be fully availa‐
ble.◀
After a battery replacement, have the battery
registered on the vehicle by your service center
to ensure that all comfort functions are fully
available and that any Check Control messages
are no longer displayed.
Charging the battery
Note
Do not plug the charger into the socket
Do not connect battery chargers to the
factory-installed sockets in the vehicle. Doing so
may result in damage to the vehicle.◀
Starting aid terminals
In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
starting aid terminals, refer to page 272, in the
engine compartment with the engine off.
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, some equipment
needs to be reinitialized.
Individual settings need to be reprogrammed:
▷ Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory:
store the positions again.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Radio station: save again.
▷ Navigation system: wait for the operability of
the navigation.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by your
service center or bring them to a recy‐
cling center.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Notes
Replacing fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a substitute
of another color or amperage rating; this could
lead to a circuit overload, ultimately resulting in
a fire in the vehicle.◀
Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse
types and locations are stored in the fuse box in
the cargo area.
Seite 268
Mobility Replacing components
268
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
In the glove compartment
Push the handle to the side, arrow 1, and open
the lid, arrow 2.
In the cargo area
Remove cover.
Information on the fuse types and locations is
found on a separate sheet.
Seite 269
Replacing components Mobility
269
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located in the center console.
Emergency Request
Requirements
▷ Equipment version with full preparation
package mobile phone.
An Emergency Request can be made, even
if no mobile phones are paired with the ve‐
hicle.
▷ BMW Assist is activated.
▷ The radio ready state is switched on.
▷ The BMW Assist system is logged in to a
wireless communications network sup‐
ported by BMW Assist.
▷ The Assist system is functional.
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
Emergency Request not guaranteed
For technical reasons, the Emergency Re‐
quest cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable
conditions.◀
Service contract
▷ After your contract with BMW Assist has ex‐
pired, the BMW Assist system can be deac‐
tivated by the service center without you
having to visit a workshop.
After deactivation, an Emergency Request
is no longer possible.
▷ Under certain circumstances, the system
can be reactivated by a service center after
you sign a new contract.
Initiating an Emergency Request
1.
Press the cover briefly to open it.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
button lights up.
▷ The LED lights up: an Emergency Request
was initiated.
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
until the voice connection has been estab‐
lished.
▷ The LED flashes if the connection to the
BMW Assist Response Center has been es‐
tablished.
After the Emergency Request arrives at the
BMW Assist Response Center, the BMW
Seite 270
Mobility Breakdown assistance
270
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Assist Response Center contacts you and
takes further steps to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW
Assist Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circumstan‐
ces.
For this purpose, data that are used to de‐
termine the necessary rescue measures,
such as the current position of the vehicle if
it can be established, are transmitted to the
BMW Assist Response Center.
▷ If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist
Response Center cannot be heard on the
hands-free system, the hands-free system
may be malfunctioning. However, the BMW
Assist Response Center may still be able to
hear you.
Initiating an Emergency Request
automatically
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐
quest is automatically initiated immediately after
a severe accident. Automatic Collision Notifica‐
tion is not affected by pressing the SOS button.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located on the inside of
the trunk lid.
To remove, loosen the bracket.
First aid kit
The first aid kit is located in a compartment on
the right side in the cargo area. Raise the cover
to remove it.
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents reg‐
ularly and replace any expired items promptly.
Roadside Assistance
Service availability
Roadside Assistance can be reached around the
clock in many countries. You can obtain assis‐
tance there in the event of a vehicle breakdown.
Roadside Assistance
The Roadside Assistance, refer to page 238,
phone number can be viewed on the iDrive or a
connection to Roadside Assistance can be es‐
tablished directly.
Jump-starting
Notes
If the battery is discharged, an engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle and
two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with
fully insulated clamp handles.
To prevent personal injury or damage to both
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
Seite 271
Breakdown assistance Mobility
271
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Do not touch live parts
To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury,
always avoid all contact with electrical compo‐
nents while the engine is running.◀
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This informa‐
tion can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Bodywork contact between vehicles
Make sure that there is no contact be‐
tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other‐
wise, there is the danger of short circuits.◀
Starting aid terminals
Connecting order
Connect the jumper cables in the correct
order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury
from sparking.◀
The so-called starting aid terminal in the engine
compartment acts as the battery's positive ter‐
minal.
The body ground or a special nut acts as the
negative terminal.
Connecting the cables
1.
Pull off the cap of the BMW starting aid ter‐
minal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting aid
terminal of the assisting vehicle.
3. Attach the other end of the cable to the pos‐
itive terminal of the battery, or to the corre‐
sponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle
to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding engine or
body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the other end of the cable to the neg‐
ative terminal of the battery, or to the corre‐
sponding engine or body ground of the ve‐
hicle to be started.
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1.
Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and
let it run for several minutes at an increased
idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle being started
in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before making another
attempt in order to allow the discharged bat‐
tery to recharge.
Seite 272
Mobility Breakdown assistance
272
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
order.
Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
Tow-starting and towing
Transportieren Transporting your
vehicle
Note
Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
Therefore, contact a service center in the event
of a breakdown.
Do not have the vehicle towed
Have your vehicle transported on a loading
platform only; otherwise, damage may occur.◀
Tow truck
Do not lift the vehicle
Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may
result.◀
Use the tow fitting screwed in at the front for
maneuvering the vehicle only.
Towing other vehicles
General information
Light towing vehicle
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will
not be possible to control the vehicle re‐
sponse.◀
Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly
Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may
cause damage.◀
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐
pending on local regulations.
▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly
identify the vehicle being towed by placing
a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐
dow.
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited during cor‐
nering.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that
the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on
the vehicle components when towing, always
use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attaching the tow rope correctly
Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit‐
ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is se‐
cured on other parts of the vehicle.◀
Seite 273
Breakdown assistance Mobility
273
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the
front or rear of the BMW. It is contained in the
onboard vehicle tool kit under the cargo floor
cover.
Tow fitting, information on use
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with
the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads
only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,
do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the ve‐
hicle can occur.◀
Screw thread
Push out the cover by pressing on the top edge.
Tow-starting
Note
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Due to the automatic transmission, the engine
cannot be started by tow-starting.
Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem‐
edied.
Seite 274
Mobility Breakdown assistance
274
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Care
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Car washes
Notes
Steam jets or high-pressure washers
When using steam jets or high-pressure
washers, hold them a sufficient distance away
and use a maximum temperature of
140 ℉/60 ℃.
Ensure that a distance of at least 31.5 in‐
ches/50 cm is maintained at all times. Holding
them too close or using excessively high pres‐
sures or temperatures can cause damage or
preliminary damage that may then lead to long-
term damage.
Follow the operating instructions for the high-
pressure washer.◀
Cleaning sensors/cameras with high-
pressure washers
When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the exterior sensors and cameras, e.g.,
Park Distance Control, for extended periods of
time and only from a distance of at least
12 in/30 cm.◀
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in win‐
ter.
Intense soiling and road salt can damage the ve‐
hicle.
Automatic car washes
Notes
Note the following:
▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or those
that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint
damage.
▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not
damaged by the transport mechanisms.
▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they
may be damaged, depending on the width of
the vehicle.
▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to page 65,
to avoid unintentional wiper activation.
▷ In some cases, an unintentional alarm can be
triggered by the interior motion sensor of the
alarm system. Follow the instructions on
avoiding an unintentional alarm, refer to
page 41.
Guide rails in car washes
Avoid car washes with guide rails higher
than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body
could be damaged.◀
Before driving into a car wash
In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a car
wash, take the following steps:
1.
Release parking brake, refer to page 61, and
deactivate Automatic Hold, refer to
page 62.
2. Drive into the car wash.
3. Depress the brake pedal as needed.
4. Engage transmission position N.
5. Switch the engine off. In this way, the igni‐
tion remains switched on, and a Check-Con‐
trol message is displayed.
Seite 275
Care Mobility
275
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Transmission position P with the igni‐
tion off
When the ignition is switched off, position P
is engaged automatically. When in an auto‐
matic car wash, for example, ensure that the
ignition is not switched off accidentally.◀
The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside
when in transmission position N. A signal is
sounded when an attempt is made to lock the
vehicle.
Transmission position
Transmission position P is engaged automati‐
cally:
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
▷ After approx. 15 minutes.
Headlamps
▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or
caustic cleansers.
▷ Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due to
insects, with shampoo and wash off with
water.
▷ Thaw ice with deicing spray; do not use an
ice scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can
be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can
occur.
Vehicle care
Car care products
BMW recommends using cleaning and care
products from BMW, since these have been
tested and approved.
Car care and cleaning products
Follow the instructions on the container.
When cleaning the interior, open the doors or
windows.
Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐
cles.
Cleansers can contain substances that are dan‐
gerous and harmful to your health.◀
Vehicle paint
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention.
Environmental influences can act on the vehicle
paint. Tailor the frequency and extent of your car
care to these influences.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather often, using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
wear and premature degradation of the leather
surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, provide leather care roughly every two
months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
more visible.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Suitable care products are available from the
service center.
Upholstery material care
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use a
soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable
interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐
terial vigorously.
Seite 276
Mobility Care
276
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Damage from Velcro® fasteners
Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or other
articles of clothing can damage the seat covers.
Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.◀
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
Use wheel cleaner, particularly during the winter
months. Do not use aggressive, acidic, strongly
alkaline or abrasive cleaners, or steam jets
above 140 ℉/60 ℃; follow the manufacturer's
instructions.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radiator
grille or door handles with an ample supply of
water, possibly with shampoo added, particu‐
larly when they have been exposed to road salt.
Rubber components
Aside from water, treat only with rubber cleans‐
ers.
When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any sil‐
icon-containing car care products in order to
avoid damage or reduced noise damping.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft
cloth.
Plastic components
These include:
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
▷ Headliner.
▷ Lamp lenses.
▷ Instrument cluster cover.
▷ Matte black spray-coated components.
▷ Painted parts in the interior.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Lightly dampen the cloth with water.
Do not soak the headliner.
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol
or solvents
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐
vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead to
surface damage.◀
Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Chemical cleaning
Do not clean chemically; this can destroy
the webbing.◀
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
belts clipped into their buckles.
Do not allow the reels to retract the safety belts
until they are dry.
Floor carpets and floor mats
No objects in the area around the pedals
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
impeded while driving
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
mats or other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved for
the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened
again after they were removed for cleaning, for
example.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the passenger
compartment for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To
prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth
in the direction of travel only.
Seite 277
Care Mobility
277
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Sensors/cameras
To clean sensors and cameras, use a cloth mois‐
tened with a small amount of glass cleaner.
Displays/screens
Clean the displays with an antistatic microfiber
cloth.
Cleaning displays
Do not use chemical or household cleans‐
ers.
Keep all fluids and moisture away from the unit.
Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa‐
ces or electrical components.
Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do
not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage
can result.◀
Long-term vehicle storage
Your service center can advise you on what to
consider when storing the vehicle for longer
than three months.
Seite 278
Mobility Care
278
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Seite 279
Care Mobility
279
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Reference
This chapter contains technical data, short
commands for the voice activation system, and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Technical data
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Dimensions
Width, height
1 Vehicle height: 54.8 inches/1,392 mm
2 Vehicle width without mirrors: 74.6 inches/
1,894 mm
3 Vehicle width with mirrors: 81.9 inches/
2,081 mm
Seite 282
Reference Technical data
282
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Length, wheel base
1 Wheelbase: 116.9 inches/2,968 mm 2 Length: 197.2 inches/5,009 mm
Smallest turning circle
Dia.: 39.4 ft/12.0 m
Weights
640i Gran Coupe
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,203/2,360
Load lbs/kg 904/410
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,513/1,140
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,855/1,295
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 16.2-44.6/460-1,265
Seite 283
Technical data Reference
283
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Short commands of the voice activation
system
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
General information
Instructions for voice activation system, refer to
page 22.
To have the available spoken instructions read
out loud: ›Voice commands‹
The following short commands are valid for ve‐
hicles with voice activation system. They do not
work in equipment packages with which only the
mobile phone can be operated by voice activa‐
tion.
Adjusting
Vehicle
Function Command
Open the main menu. ›Main menu‹
Open the options. ›Options‹
Open the settings. ›Settings‹
Info display of the instrument cluster. ›Info Display‹
Settings on the Control Display. ›Control display‹
Open the time and date. ›Time and date‹
Open the language and units. ›Language and units‹
Open the speed limit. ›Speed‹
Open the light. ›Lighting‹
Open the door lock. ›Door locks‹
Open the profiles. ›Profiles‹
Seite 285
Short commands of the voice activation system Reference
285
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Function Command
Open the Driving Mode menu. ›Driving mode‹
Open the ECO PRO menu. ›ECO PRO mode‹
Equipment
Function Command
Open the air conditioning settings. ›Climate‹
Open the Head-up Display. ›head up display‹
Vehicle information
Owner's Manual
Function Command
Open the Owner's Manual. ›Display Owner's Manual‹
Open the Quick Reference Guide. ›Quick reference‹
Open the index. ›Owner's Manual‹
Open the search by pictures. ›Search by pictures‹
Computer
Function Command
Call up the onboard computer. ›Onboard info‹
Call up the trip computer. ›Trip computer‹
Vehicle
Function Command
Open the vehicle information. ›Vehicle info‹
Open the vehicle status. ›Vehicle status‹
Call up ECO PRO tips. ›ECO PRO Tips‹
Seite 286
Reference Short commands of the voice activation system
286
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Function Command
Open EfficientDynamics menu. ›Efficient Dynamics‹
EfficientDynamics split screen. ›Split screen Efficient Dynamics‹
Navigation
General information
Function Command
Opens the Navigation menu. ›Navigation‹
Open the destination entry. ›Enter address‹
Enter the address. ›Enter address‹
Enter a town/city. ›City‹
Enter a state/province. ›State‹
Enter the postal code. ›Postal Code‹
Open destination guidance. ›Guidance‹
Start destination guidance. ›Start guidance‹
Terminate destination guidance. ›Stop guidance‹
Open the home address. ›Home address‹
Open the route criteria. ›Route preference‹
Open the route. ›Route information‹
Turn on spoken instructions. ›Switch on voice instructions‹
Repeat the spoken instruction. ›Repeat voice instructions‹
Turn off spoken instructions. ›Switch off voice instructions‹
Display the address book. ›Address book‹
Display the most recent destinations. ›Last destinations‹
Open the traffic bulletins. ›Traffic Info‹
Special destinations. ›Points of interest‹
Seite 287
Short commands of the voice activation system Reference
287
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Map
Function Command
Display the map. ›Map‹
Map facing north. ›Map facing north‹
Map facing the direction of travel. ›Map in direction of travel‹
Perspective map. ›Map perspective view‹
Automatic scaling of the map. ›Map with automatic scaling‹
Scale...feet. ›Map scale ... feet‹
Scale...meters. ›Map scale ... meters‹ e.g., map scale 100 meters
Scale...kilometers. ›Map scale ... kilometers‹ e.g., map scale 5 kilo‐
meters
Scale...miles. ›Map scale ... miles‹ e.g., map scale 5 miles
Split screen settings
Function Command
Split screen. ›Switch on splitscreen‹
Switch off the split screen. ›Turn off split screen‹
Adjust the split screen. ›Split screen content‹
Split screen, map facing north. ›Split screen map facing north‹
Split screen, current position. ›Split screen current position‹
Split screen, facing the direction of travel. ›Split screen map in direction of travel‹
Split screen, perspective. ›Split screen perspective‹
Split screen, expanded intersection zoom. ›Splitscreen Exit ramp view‹
Split screen scale...feet. ›Split screen scale ... feet‹ e.g., split screen scale
100 feet
Split screen scale...meters. ›Split screen scale ... meters‹ e.g., split screen
scale 100 meters
Split screen scale...kilometers. ›Split screen scale ... kilometers‹ e.g., split screen
scale 5 kilometers
Seite 288
Reference Short commands of the voice activation system
288
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Function Command
Split screen scale...miles. ›Split screen scale ... miles‹ e.g., split screen
scale 5 miles
Split screen, highlight the traffic situation. ›Split screen, Traffic conditions‹
Split screen, computer. ›Split screen on board info‹
Split screen, trip computer. ›Splitscreen trip computer‹
Split screen, scale automatically. ›Split screen automatic scaling‹
Destination guidance with intermediate destinations
Function Command
Enter a new destination. ›Enter address‹
Trip list. ›Stored trips‹
Radio
FM
Function Command
Open a frequency. ›Frequency ... megahertz‹ e.g., 93.5 megahertz
or frequency 93.5
Open the radio. ›Radio‹
Open the FM stations. ›F M‹
Open the manual search. ›Manual‹
Select a frequency range. ›Select frequency‹
Open a station. ›Select station‹
Seite 289
Short commands of the voice activation system Reference
289
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
AM
Function Command
Open a frequency. ›Frequency ... Kilohertz‹ e.g., frequency 753 or
753 kilohertz
Open the AM stations. ›A M‹
Open the manual search. ›Manual‹
Satellite radio
Function Command
Open the satellite radio. ›Satellite radio‹
Switch on the satellite radio. ›Satellite radio on‹
Select a satellite radio channel. ›Select satellite radio‹ e.g., satellite radio channel
2
Stored stations
Function Command
Open the stored stations. ›Presets‹
Choose a stored station. ›Select preset‹
Select a stored station. ›Preset ...‹ e. g., stored station 2
CD/Multimedia
CD/DVD drive
Function Command
Select a track. ›Track ...‹ e.g., track 5
or
›C D track ...‹ e.g., CD track 5
Play back a CD. ›C D on‹
Select a CD. ›Select C D‹
Select a CD and track. ›C D ... track ...‹ e.g., CD 3 track 5
Seite 290
Reference Short commands of the voice activation system
290
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Function Command
Open the CD and Multimedia menus. ›C D and multimedia‹
CD and DVD. ›C D‹
Select a DVD. ›D V D ...‹ e.g. DVD 3
Display the entertainment details on a split
screen.
›Entertainment details‹
Music collection
Function Command
Search for music, open a menu. ›Music search‹
Open the current playback. ›Current playback‹
Open the music collection. ›Music collection‹
Play back the music collection. ›Music collection on‹
Play back the most frequently played tracks. ›Top fifty‹
External devices
Function Command
Open the external devices. ›External devices‹
Open the Bluetooth devices. ›Bluetooth‹
AUX at front. ›AUX front‹
Tone
Function Command
Open the tone settings. ›Tone‹
Seite 291
Short commands of the voice activation system Reference
291
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Telephone
Function Command
Dial a phone number. ›Dial number‹
Opens the Telephone menu. ›Telephone‹
Display the phone book. ›Phonebook‹
Redialing. ›Redial‹
Display received calls. ›Received calls‹
List of messages. ›Messages‹
Open the Bluetooth devices. ›Bluetooth‹
Contacts
Function Command
Select a name. ›Choose name‹
My contacts. ›My contacts‹
Open the contacts. ›Contacts‹
New contact. ›New contact‹
BMW Assist or ConnectedDrive
Function Command
Open BMW Assist.
Open ConnectedDrive.
›B M W Assist‹
›Connected Drive‹
Open BMW Search. ›B M W Online‹
Seite 292
Reference Short commands of the voice activation system
292
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Seite 293
Short commands of the voice activation system Reference
293
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐
tem 99
ACC, Active Cruise Control
with Stop & Go 105
Activated-charcoal filter 134
Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion 97
Active Cruise Control with
Stop & Go, ACC 105
Active seat, front 48
Active seat ventilation,
front 49
Active Steering, integral 101
Adaptive brake assistant 99
Adaptive brake lights, refer to
Brake force display 98
Adaptive drive 101
Adaptive light control 84
Additional telephone 214
Additives, oil 260
Adjustments, seats/head re‐
straints 46
After washing vehicle 276
Airbags 87
Airbags, indicator/warning
light 88
Air circulation, refer to Recir‐
culated-air mode 133
Air, dehumidifying, refer to
Cooling function 133
Air distribution, manual 132
Air pressure, tires 249
Air vents, refer to Ventila‐
tion 134
Air volume, automatic climate
control 132
Alarm system 40
Alarm, unintentional 41
All around the center con‐
sole 14
All around the interior rearview
mirror 15
All around the steering
wheel 12
ALL program, automatic cli‐
mate control 133
All-season tires, refer to Win‐
ter tires 254
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitter 137
Alternative oil types 260
AM/FM station 183
Announcement, navigation,
refer to Spoken instruc‐
tions 170
Antifreeze, washer fluid 66
Antilock Brake System,
ABS 99
Anti-slip control, refer to
DSC 99
Applications 241
Appointments 231
Approved axle load 283
Approved engine oils 260
Apps 241
Apps, video playback 206
Armrest, refer to Front center
armrest 144
Armrest, refer to Rear center
armrest 144
Arrival time 78
Ashtray 138
Ashtray, rear 138
Assistance, Roadside Assis‐
tance 271
Assistance when driving
off 99
Assist, BMW 237
Audio playback 192
Audio playback, Blue‐
tooth 206
AUTO H button, refer to Auto‐
matic Hold 62
AUTO intensity 132
Automatic car wash 275
Automatic Cruise Control with
Stop & Go 105
Automatic Curb Monitor 53
Automatic deactivation, front
passenger airbags 89
Automatic headlamp con‐
trol 83
Automatic Hold 62
Automatic locking 37
Automatic recirculated-air
control 133
Automatic Soft Closing,
doors 38
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 67
AUTO program, automatic cli‐
mate control 132
AUTO program, intensity 132
Auto Start/Stop function 59
AUX-IN port 203
Average fuel consumption 78
Average speed 78
Axle loads, weights 283
B
Backrest curvature, refer to
Lumbar support 47
Backrest, seats 46
Backrest, width 47
Backup camera 117
Balance 180
Band-Aids, refer to First aid
kit 271
Bang & Olufsen 181
Seite 294
Reference Everything from A to Z
294
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Bar for tow-starting/tow‐
ing 273
Bass 180
Battery replacement, vehicle
battery 268
Battery replacement, vehicle
remote control 30
Battery, vehicle 268
Belts, safety belts 49
Beverage holder, cu‐
pholder 145
Blinds, sun protection 43
Bluetooth audio 206
Bluetooth connection, activat‐
ing/deactivating 215
BMW Assist 237
BMW Homepage 6
BMW Internet page 6
BMW Maintenance Sys‐
tem 262
BMW Search 239
Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐
pholder 145
Brake assistant 99
Brake assistant, adaptive 99
Brake discs, breaking in 150
Brake force display 98
Brake lamps, brake force dis‐
play 98
Brake lamps, bulb replace‐
ment 266
Brake lights, adaptive 98
Brake pads, breaking in 150
Braking, notes 151
Breakdown assis‐
tance 270, 271
Breaking in 150
Brightness of Control Dis‐
play 81
Bulb replacement 264
Bulb replacement, front 265
Bulb replacement, rear 266
Bulbs and lamps 264
Button, RES 107
Button, Start/Stop 58
Bypassing, refer to Jump-
starting 271
C
Calendar 231
California Proposition 65
Warning 7
Camera, backup camera 119
Camera, care 278
Camera, Side View 122
Camera, Top View 121
Can holder, refer to Cu‐
pholder 145
Car battery 268
Car care products 276
Care, displays 278
Care, vehicle 276
Cargo 153
Cargo area, enlarging 139
Cargo area lid 38
Cargo area, storage compart‐
ments 145
Cargo straps, securing
cargo 154
Car key, refer to Remote con‐
trol 30
Carpet, care 277
Car wash 275
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 150
CBS Condition Based Serv‐
ice 262
CD/DVD 191
CDs, storing 198
Cell phone 214
Center console 14
Center speaker 181
Central locking system 33
Central screen, refer to Control
Display 16
Central speaker 181
Changes, technical, refer to
Safety 6
Changing parts 264
Changing wheels 267
Changing wheels/tires 253
Check Control 71
Children, seating position 55
Children, transporting
safely 55
Child restraint fixing sys‐
tem 55
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 56
Child restraint fixing systems,
mounting 55
Child seat, mounting 55
Child seats 55
Chrome parts, care 277
Cigarette lighter 138
Cleaning, displays 278
Climate control 131
Climate control wind‐
shield 151
Clock 74
Closing/opening from in‐
side 37
Closing/opening via door
lock 36
Closing/opening with remote
control 34
Clothes hooks 145
Collision warning 111
Combination switch, refer to
Turn signals 64
Combination switch, refer to
Wiper system 64
Comfort Access 39
COMFORT program, Driving
Experience Switch 104
Computer 77
Concierge service 238
Condensation on win‐
dows 132
Condensation under the vehi‐
cle 152
Condition Based Service
CBS 262
Confirmation signal 35
Contacts 227, 235
Control Display 16
Seite 295
Everything from A to Z Reference
295
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Control Display, settings 79
Controller 16
Control systems, driving sta‐
bility 99
Convenient opening 35
Coolant 261
Coolant temperature 74
Cooling function 133
Cooling, maximum 132
Cooling system 261
Corrosion on brake discs 152
Cruise control 113
Cruise control, active with
Stop & Go 105
Cruising range 75
Cupholder 145
Current fuel consumption 75
Current location, storing 162
Customer Relations 240
D
Damage, tires 253
Damping control, dy‐
namic 101
Data, technical 282
Date 75
Daytime running lights 83
Defrosting, refer to Windows,
defrosting 132
Dehumidifying, air 133
Destination distance 78
Destination guidance 168
Destination guidance with in‐
termediate destinations 167
Destination input, naviga‐
tion 160
Digital clock 74
Digital radio 184
Dimensions 282
Dimmable exterior mirrors 53
Dimmable interior rearview
mirror 54
Direction indicator, refer to
Turn signals 64
Display, ECO PRO 156
Display in windshield 129
Display lighting, refer to Instru‐
ment lighting 85
Displays 70
Displays, cleaning 278
Disposal, coolant 261
Disposal, vehicle battery 268
Distance control, refer to
PDC 115
Distance, selecting for
ACC 107
Distance to destination 78
Divided screen view, split
screen 20
Door lock, refer to Remote
control 30
Doors, Automatic Soft Clos‐
ing 38
Drive-off assistant 99
Drive-off assistant, refer to
DSC 99
Driving Experience
Switch 102
Driving instructions, breaking
in 150
Driving notes, general 150
Driving stability control sys‐
tems 99
Driving tips 150
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 99
DTC driving dynamics 100
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol 100
DVD/CD 191
DVD/CD notes 197
DVD changer 195
DVD settings 194
DVDs, storing 198
DVD, video 193
Dynamic Damping Con‐
trol 101
Dynamic destination guid‐
ance 175
Dynamic Drive 101
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 99
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 100
E
ECO PRO 156
EfficientDynamics 157
EfficientDynamics menu, refer
to ECO PRO 156
Electronic displays, instru‐
ment cluster 71
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, refer to DSC 99
Emergency detection, remote
control 31
Emergency release, door
lock 37
Emergency release, fuel filler
flap 246
Emergency Request 270
Emergency service, refer to
Roadside Assistance 271
Emergency start function, en‐
gine start 31
Emergency unlocking, trunk
lid 39
Energy Control 75
Energy recovery 75
Engine, automatic Start/Stop
function 59
Engine, automatic switch-
off 59
Engine compartment 257
Engine compartment, working
in 257
Engine coolant 261
Engine oil 259
Engine oil, adding 259
Engine oil additives 260
Engine oil change 260
Engine oil filler neck 259
Engine oil temperature 74
Engine oil types, alterna‐
tive 260
Seite 296
Reference Everything from A to Z
296
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Engine oil types, ap‐
proved 260
Engine start during malfunc‐
tion 31
Engine start, jump-start‐
ing 271
Engine start, refer to Starting
the engine 59
Engine stop 59
Engine temperature 74
Entering/exiting vehicle, assis‐
tance, steering wheel 54
Entering a car wash 275
Equalizer 180
Equipment, interior 136
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram, refer to DSC 99
Exchanging wheels/tires 253
Exhaust system 150
Exterior mirror, automatic dim‐
ming feature 53
Exterior mirrors 52
External devices 203
External start 271
External temperature dis‐
play 74
External temperature warn‐
ing 74
Eyes for securing cargo 154
F
Fader 180
Failure message, refer to
Check Control 71
False alarm, refer to Uninten‐
tional alarm 41
Fan, refer to Air volume 132
Fault displays, refer to Check
Control 71
Filler neck for engine oil 259
Fine wood, care 277
First aid kit 271
Fitting for towing, refer to Tow
fitting 274
Flat tire, changing wheels 267
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 93
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 90
Flat tire, warning lamp 91, 94
Flooding 151
Floor carpet, care 277
Floor mats, care 277
FM/AM station 183
Fold-out position, windshield
wipers 66
Foot brake 151
For the headliner, refer to All
around the interior rearview
mirror 15
Front airbags 87
Front center armrest 144
Front fog lamps 85
Front lamps 265
Front passenger airbags, au‐
tomatic deactivation 89
Front passenger airbags, indi‐
cator lamp 89
Front seats 46
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 93
Fuel cap 246
Fuel consumption, current 75
Fuel consumption, refer to
Average fuel consump‐
tion 78
Fuel filler flap 246
Fuel gauge 74
Fuel quality 248
Fuel, tank capacity 284
Fuse 268
G
Garage door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote
control 136
Gas station recommenda‐
tion 170
Gear change, automatic trans‐
mission 67
General driving notes 150
Glass sunroof, powered with
tilt function 44
Glove compartment 143
Gong, volume equaliza‐
tion 181
GPS navigation 160
Gray display of the map 174
Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
proved 283
H
Handbrake, refer to Parking
brake 61
Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
nating code 137
Hazard warning flashers 270
HD Radio 184
Head airbags 87
Headlamp control, auto‐
matic 83
Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐
ture 83
Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐
ture via remote control 35
Headlamp flasher 64
Headlamp glass 265
Headlamps 265
Headlamps, care 276
Headlamp washer system 64
Head restraints 46
Head restraints, front 51
Head-Up Display 129
Head-up Display, care 278
Heavy cargo, stowing 154
Height, seats 46
Height, vehicle 282
High-beam Assistant 84
High beams 64
High beams/low beams, refer
to High-beam Assistant 84
Hills 152
Hill start assistant, refer to
Drive-off assistant 99
Hints 6
Holder for beverages 145
Seite 297
Everything from A to Z Reference
297
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Homepage 6
Hood 257
Horn 12
Hotel function, trunk lid 39
Hot exhaust system 150
House number, entering for
navigation 161
HUD Head-Up Display 129
Hydroplaning 151
I
Ice warning, refer to External
temperature warning 74
Icy roads, refer to External
temperature warning 74
Identification marks, tires 251
Identification number, refer to
Important in the engine com‐
partment 257
iDrive 16
Ignition key, refer to Remote
control 30
Ignition off 58
Ignition on 58
Indication of a flat tire 91, 94
Individual air distribution 132
Individual settings, refer to
Personal Profile 31
Inflation pressure, tires 249
Inflation pressure warning
FTM, tires 93
Info display, refer to Com‐
puter 77
Information on the navigation
data 175
Initialization, Integral Active
Steering 102
Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 91
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 94
Instrument cluster 70
Instrument cluster, electronic
displays 71
Instrument lighting 85
Integral Active Steering 101
Integrated key 30
Integrated universal remote
control 136
Intensity, AUTO program 132
Interactive map 165
Interior equipment 136
Interior lamps 86
Interior lamps via remote con‐
trol 35
Interior motion sensor 41
Interior rearview mirror, auto‐
matic dimming feature 54
Intermediate destinations 167
Internet page 6
Intersection, entering for navi‐
gation 161
Interval display, service re‐
quirements 75
iPod/iPhone 203
J
Jacking points for the vehicle
jack 267
Jack, refer to Vehicle jack 267
Joystick, automatic transmis‐
sion 67
Jump-starting 271
K
Key/remote control 30
Keyless Go, refer to Comfort
Access 39
Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 31
Kickdown, automatic trans‐
mission 67
Knee airbag 87
L
Lamp replacement 264
Lamp replacement, front 265
Lamp replacement, rear 266
Lamps 82
Lamps and bulbs 264
Lane departure warning 95
Lane margin, warning 95
Language on Control Dis‐
play 80
Lashing eyes, securing
cargo 154
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 56
Leather, care 276
LED headlamps 265
LEDs, light-emitting di‐
odes 265
Length, vehicle 283
Letters and numbers, enter‐
ing 21
License plate lamp, bulb re‐
placement 266
Light-alloy wheels, care 277
Light control 84
Light-emitting diodes,
LEDs 265
Lighting 82
Lighting, speaker 181
Lighting via remote control 35
Light switch 82
Load 153
Loading 153
Lock, door 36
Locking/unlocking from in‐
side 37
Locking/unlocking via door
lock 36
Locking/unlocking with re‐
mote control 34
Locking, automatic 37
Locking, central 33
Locking via trunk lid 39
Lock, power window 43
Low beams 82
Low beams, automatic, refer to
High-beam Assistant 84
Lower back support 47
Lug bolt lock 267
Lumbar support 47
Seite 298
Reference Everything from A to Z
298
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
M
Maintenance 262
Maintenance require‐
ments 262
Maintenance, service require‐
ments 75
Maintenance system,
BMW 262
Malfunction displays, refer to
Check Control 71
Manual air distribution 132
Manual air volume 132
Manual brake, refer to Parking
brake 61
Manual mode, transmis‐
sion 68
Manual operation, backup
camera 118
Manual operation, door
lock 37
Manual operation, exterior mir‐
rors 53
Manual operation, fuel filler
flap 246
Manual operation, Park Dis‐
tance Control PDC 116
Manual operation, Side
View 122
Manual operation, Top
View 120
Map, destination entry 165
Map in split screen 172
Map view 170
Marking on approved
tires 254
Marking, run-flat tires 255
Massage seat, front 48
Master key, refer to Remote
control 30
Maximum cooling 132
Maximum speed, winter
tires 254
Measure, units of 80
Medical kit 271
Memory for seat, mirrors,
steering wheel 52
Menu, EfficientDynamics 157
Menu in instrument cluster 76
Menus, operating, iDrive 16
Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐
ing concept 17
Message list, traffic bulle‐
tins 172
Messages 229
Messages, refer to Check
Control 71
Microfilter 134
Minimum tread, tires 253
Mirror 52
Mirror memory 52
Mobile communication devi‐
ces in the vehicle 151
Mobile phone 214
Mode, ECO PRO 156
Modifications, technical, refer
to Safety 6
Moisture in headlamp 265
Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐
play 16
Mounting of child restraint fix‐
ing systems 55
MP3 player 203
Multifunction steering wheel,
buttons 12
Multimedia 191
Music collection 198
Music search 199
Music, storing 198
N
Navigation 160
Navigation data 175
Neck restraints, front, refer to
Head restraints 51
New wheels and tires 253
Night Vision with pedestrian
detection 126
Notes 232
Nylon rope for tow-starting/
towing 273
O
OBD Onboard Diagnos‐
tics 263
Obstacle marking, backup
camera 119
Odometer 74
Office 226
Oil 259
Oil, adding 259
Oil additives 260
Oil change 260
Oil change interval, service re‐
quirements 75
Oil filler neck 259
Oil types, alternative 260
Oil types, approved 260
Old batteries, disposal 268
Onboard Diagnostics
OBD 263
Onboard monitor, refer to
Control Display 16
Onboard vehicle tool kit 264
Opening/closing from in‐
side 37
Opening/closing via door
lock 36
Opening/closing with remote
control 34
Operating concept, iDrive 16
Optional equipment, standard
equipment 6
Outside air, refer to Automatic
recirculated-air control 133
Overheating of engine, refer to
Coolant temperature 74
P
Paint, vehicle 276
Pair mobile phone 215
Panic mode 35
Parallel parking assistant 122
Seite 299
Everything from A to Z Reference
299
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Park Distance Control
PDC 115
Parked-car ventilation 135
Parked vehicle, condensa‐
tion 152
Parking aid, refer to PDC 115
Parking assistant 122
Parking brake 61
Parking lamps 82
Parking with Auto Hold 62
Passenger side mirror, tilting
downward 53
Pathway lines, backup cam‐
era 118
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol 115
Pedestrian detection, refer to
Night Vision 126
People detection, refer to
Night Vision 126
Personal information 226
Personal Profile 31
Phone 214
Pinch protection system, glass
sunroof 44
Pinch protection system, win‐
dows 42
Plastic, care 277
PlugIn 242
Position, storing 162
Postal code, entering in navi‐
gation 161
Power failure 268
Power sunroof, glass 44
Power windows 42
Pressure, tire air pres‐
sure 249
Pressure warning FTM,
tires 93
Profile, refer to Personal Pro‐
file 31
Programmable memory but‐
tons, iDrive 20
Protective function, glass sun‐
roof 44
Protective function, win‐
dows 42
Push-and-turn switch, refer to
Controller 16
R
Radiator fluid 261
Radio 183
Radio-operated key, refer to
Remote control 30
Radio ready state 58
Rain sensor 65
Random 192
Random playback 192
RDS 184
Reading out loud 233
Rear axle steering 101
Rear center armrest 144
Rear lamps 266
Rearview mirror 52
Rear window defroster 133
Recirculated-air mode 133
Recommended tire
brands 254
Refueling 246
Remaining range 75
Reminders 233
Remote control/key 30
Remote control, malfunc‐
tion 36
Remote control, universal 136
Renaming a station 184
Replacement fuse 268
Replacing parts 264
Replacing wheels/tires 253
Reporting safety defects 8
RES button 107
Reserve warning, refer to
Range 75
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 91
Residual heat, automatic cli‐
mate control 133
Retaining straps, securing
cargo 154
Retreaded tires 254
Reversing lamp, bulb replace‐
ment 266
Roadside Assistance 238
Roadside parking lamps 83
Roller sunblinds 43
Roll stabilization, refer to
Adaptive Drive 101
Roll stabilization, refer to Dy‐
namic Drive 101
Rope for tow-starting/tow‐
ing 273
Route 169
Route criteria, route 168
Route, displaying 169
Routes, avoiding 168
Route section, bypassing 169
RSC Run Flat System Compo‐
nent, refer to Run-flat
tires 255
Rubber components,
care 277
Run-flat tires 255
S
Safe braking 151
Safety 6
Safety belt reminder for driv‐
er's seat and front passenger
seat 50
Safety belts 49
Safety belts, care 277
Safety switch, windows 43
Safety systems, airbags 87
Satellite radio 185
Saving fuel 0
Scale, changing during navi‐
gation 171
Screen, refer to Control Dis‐
play 16
Screwdriver 264
Screw thread for tow fit‐
ting 274
Search, refer to BMW
Search 239
Seite 300
Reference Everything from A to Z
300
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Seat belts, refer to Safety
belts 49
Seat heating, front 48
Seat heating, rear 49
Seating position for chil‐
dren 55
Seat, mirror, and steering
wheel memory 52
Seats 46
Seat ventilation, front 49
Selection list in instrument
cluster 76
Selector lever, automatic
transmission 67
Sensors, care 278
Service and warranty 7
Service requirements, Condi‐
tion Based Service CBS 262
Service requirements, dis‐
play 75
Service, Roadside Assis‐
tance 271
Settings on Control Dis‐
play 79
Settings, storing for seat, mir‐
rors, steering wheel 52
Shifting, automatic transmis‐
sion 67
Shift paddles on steering
wheel 68
Short commands 285
Shoulder support 48
Side airbags 87
Side View 121
Signaling, horn 12
Signals when unlocking 35
Sitting safely 46
Size 282
Ski bag 141
Smallest turning circle 283
Smoker's package 138
Snap-in adapter, mobile
phone 224
Snow chains 255
Socket 139
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐
nostics 263
Software applications,
iPhone 241
Software update 210
Spare fuse 268
Speaker lighting 181
Special destinations, naviga‐
tion 163
Specified engine oil
types 260
Speed, average 78
Speed limit in the com‐
puter 78
Speed Volume, volume equal‐
ization 181
Split screen 20
Split screen map settings 172
Spoken instructions, naviga‐
tion 170
SPORT+ program, Dynamic
Driving Control 103
Sport automatic transmis‐
sion 68
SPORT program, Dynamic
Driving Control 103
Sport program, transmis‐
sion 68
Stability control systems 99
Start/stop, automatic func‐
tion 59
Start/Stop button 58
Start function during malfunc‐
tion 31
Starting the engine 59
State/province, selecting for
navigation 160
Stations, stored 189
Station, storing 183
Status display, tires 90
Status information, iDrive 19
Status of Owner's Manual 6
Steering, Integral Active
Steering 101
Steering wheel, adjusting 54
Steering wheel heating 54
Steering wheel memory 52
Steptronic, automatic trans‐
mission 67
Stopping the engine 59
Storage compartments 143
Storage compartments, loca‐
tions 143
Storage, tires 255
Storing the vehicle 278
Street, entering for naviga‐
tion 161
Summer tires, tread 253
Supplementary text mes‐
sage 73
Surround View 117
Suspension settings 102
Switch for Dynamic Driving
Control 102
Switch-on times, parked-car
ventilation 135
Switch, refer to Cockpit 12
Symbols 6
T
Tachometer 74
Tail and brake lamps 266
Tailgate 38
Tailgate via remote control 35
Tail lamps 266
Tail lamps, bulb replace‐
ment 266
Tasks 232
Technical changes, refer to
Safety 6
Technical data 282
TeleServices 238
Temperature, automatic cli‐
mate control 132
Temperature display, external
temperature 74
Temperature, engine oil 74
Tempomat, refer to Active
Cruise Control 105
Terminal, jump-starting 272
Text messages 229
Seite 301
Everything from A to Z Reference
301
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Text message, supplemen‐
tary 73
Theft alarm system, refer to
Alarm system 40
Theft protection, lug
bolts 267
Theft protection, refer to Cen‐
tral locking system 33
Thermal camera, refer to Night
Vision 126
Thigh support 47
Through-loading system 139
Tilt alarm sensor 41
Tilt glass roof 44
Tilt, seats 46
Time of arrival 78
Tire damage 253
Tire identification marks 251
Tire inflation pressure 249
Tire inflation pressure monitor,
refer to FTM 93
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 90
Tires, changing 253
Tires, everything on wheels
and tires 249
Tires, run-flat tires 255
Tire tread 253
Toll roads, route 168
Tone 180
Tools 264
Top View 120
Total vehicle weight 283
Tow fitting 274
Towing 273
Town/city, navigation 161
Tow-starting 273
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor 90
Traction control 100
TRACTION program, Dynamic
Driving Control 103
Traffic bulletins, naviga‐
tion 172
Transmission, automatic 67
Transporting children
safely 55
Tread, tires 253
Treble, tone 180
Trip computer 78
Triple turn signal activa‐
tion 64
Trip odometer 74
Trunk lid 38
Trunk lid, emergency unlock‐
ing 39
Trunk lid, hotel function 39
Trunk lid via remote con‐
trol 35
Turning circle 283
Turning circle lines, backup
camera 118
Turn signals, front, bulb re‐
placement 265
Turn signals, operation 64
Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐
placement 266
U
Unintentional alarm 41
Units of measure 80
Universal remote control 136
Unlock button, automatic
transmission 67
Unlocking/locking from in‐
side 37
Unlocking/locking via door
lock 36
Unlocking/locking with remote
control 34
Updates made after the edito‐
rial deadline 6
Updating software 210
Upholstery care 276
USB audio interface 203
USB interface 143
V
Variable steering, Integral Ac‐
tive Steering 101
Vehicle battery 268
Vehicle battery, replacing 268
Vehicle, breaking in 150
Vehicle care 276
Vehicle equipment 6
Vehicle identification number,
refer to Identification number
in the engine compart‐
ment 257
Vehicle jack 267
Vehicle paint 276
Vehicle storage 278
Vehicle wash 275
Ventilation 134
Ventilation, refer to Parked-car
ventilation 135
Version of the navigation
data 175
Video playback 193
Video playback, iPhone 206
Video playback, snap-in
adapter 206
Voice activation, mobile
phone 222
Voice activation, short com‐
mands 285
Voice activation system 22
Volume, setting 180
W
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 71
Warning triangle 271
Washer fluid 66
Washer fluid reservoir, ca‐
pacity 284
Washer nozzles, wind‐
shield 66
Washer system 64
Washing, vehicle 275
Water on roads 151
Seite 302
Reference Everything from A to Z
302
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
Weights 283
Welcome lamps 82
Wheel base, vehicle 283
Wheels, changing 253
Wheels, everything on wheels
and tires 249
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 93
Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 90
Width, vehicle 282
Window defroster, rear 133
Windows, powered 42
Windshield, climate con‐
trol 151
Windshield washer fluid 66
Windshield washer noz‐
zles 66
Windshield washer system 64
Windshield wiper 64
Windshield wipers, fold-out
position 66
Winter storage, care 278
Winter tires, suitable tires 254
Winter tires, tread 253
Wiper blades, replacing 264
Wiper fluid 66
Wiper system 64
Wood, care 277
Word match concept, naviga‐
tion 21
Wrench 264
X
Xenon headlamps, bulb re‐
placement 265
Seite 303
Everything from A to Z Reference
303
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
The Ultimate Driving
Machine
01 40 2 900 405 ue
*BL290040500O*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 900 405 - 03 12 490
